2007 Nissan Pathfinder Owners Manual

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own-er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiaritywith controls and maintenance requirements, as-sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to driv-ing and avoid using vehicle features ortaking other actions that could distractyou.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Pre-teenchildren should be seated in the rearseat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

For descriptions specified for four-wheel drivemodels, a mark is placed at the begin-ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features foroff-road use, failure to operate four-wheeldrive models correctly may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident. Be sure to read“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passengercar because it has a higher center ofgravity for off-road use. As with othervehicles with features of this type, fail-ure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-ing collision and rollover”, and “Drivingsafety precautions”, in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Z REVIEW COPY—2007 Pathfinder (pat)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)10/13/06—arosenma X

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLEThis vehicle should not be modified. Modifi-cation could affect its performance, safety ordurability, and may even violate governmen-tal regulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting from modifica-tions may not be covered under NISSANwarranties.

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL


CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORYSome vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-ies, may contain perchlorate material. Thefollowing advisory is provided: “PerchlorateMaterial – special handling may apply, Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

© 2006 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc.


NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM


Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9


1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-12)2. Supplemental curtain side-impact and

rollover air bags (if so equipped)(P. 1-39)

3. Front seat belts (P. 1-12)4. Supplemental front impact air bags

(P.1-39)5. Seats (P. 1-2)6. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P.1-47)7. Seat belt pre-tensioners (P. 1-53)8. Supplemental side-impact air bag

(if so equipped) (P. 1-39)9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-22)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0047

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents


1. Engine hood (P. 3-8)2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-24)3. Windshield (P. 8-18)4. Power windows (P. 2-47)5. Door locks, keyfob, keys

(P. 3-3, 3-5, 3-2)6. Mirrors (P. 3-14)7. Tire pressure (P. 9-11)8. Flat tire (P. 6-2)9. Tire chains (P. 8-37)10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)11. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-27)12. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-30)13. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-14)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0048

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3


1. Roof rack (P. 2-46)2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)3. Glass hatch (P. 3-10)4. Rear window washer (P.2-25)5. Glass hatch release (P.3-10)6. Lift gate release (P. 3-9)7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)8. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-10, P. 9-3)9. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-10)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0049

EXTERIOR REAR



1. DVD entertainment system(if so equipped) (P. 4-49)

2. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-49)3. Map lights (P. 2-52)4. Sun visors (P. 3-13)5. HomeLinkT universal transceiver

(if so equipped) (P. 2-53)6. Glove box (P. 2-38)7. Front seats (P. 1-2)8. 2nd row seats (P.1-10)9. 3rd row seats (P. 1-11)10. Luggage storage (P. 2-42)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0050

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT



1. Ventilators (P. 4-14)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-27)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) (P. 4-48)4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-39, P. 2-32)5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-3, 2-13)6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-15)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-24, P. 2-25)

8. Storage (P. 2-35)9. Audio system controls (P. 4-26)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-39)11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-38)12. Power outlet (P. 2-34)13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-32)14. Hill descent control switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-33)15. Shift selector lever (P. 5-11)16. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-33)WIC0877

INSTRUMENT PANEL



17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)(P. 5-18)

18. Climate controls (P. 4-15, 4-22)19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-49)20. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-31)21. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)22. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-12)23. Pedal position adjustment switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-12)24. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-16)25. Navigation system and controls*

(if so equipped) (P. 4-2)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.



VQ40DE

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir(P. 8-12)

2. Battery (P. 8-13)3. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-21)4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)7. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)8. Drive belt location (P.8-15)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WDI0507

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warn-ing light

2-14

Automatic transmis-sion oil temperaturewarning light

2-14

Automatic transmis-sion park warninglight (model)

2-14

or

Brake warning light 2-15

Charge warninglight

2-15

Door open warninglight

2-16

Warninglight

Name Page

Engine oil pressurewarning light

2-16

4WD warning light( model)

2-16

Low fuel warninglight

2-16

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-16

Low windshieldwasher fluid warninglight

2-18

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-18

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-18

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Automatic transmis-sion position indica-tor light

2-18

Cruise main switchindicator light

2-18

Cruise set switchindicator light

2-19

4WD shift indicatorlight (model)

2-19

Front passenger airbag status light

2-19

High beam indicatorlight (Blue)

2-19

Hill Descent Controlindicator light (if soequipped)

2-33

Malfunction indica-tor lamp (MIL)

2-19

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS


Z REVIEW COPY—2007 Pathfinder (pat)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)01/10/07—debbie X

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Overdrive off indica-tor light

2-20

Security indicatorlight

2-20

Slip indicator light 2-20

Transfer 4LO posi-tion indicator light( model)

2-20

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-21

Vehicle dynamiccontrol off indicatorlight

2-21



1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front power seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Active head restraint (front seats). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Child restraint installation using the seatbelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55


WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on Seat Belt Usage” later in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height ofthe seat cushion to the desired position.

WRS0175 WRS0176 WRS0131

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3


FRONT POWER SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-resetoverload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 seconds,then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for along period of time when the engine is off.This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto-matic drive positioner operation.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slidethe seat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the de-sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackforward again, move the switch forward andmove your body forward. The seatback will moveforward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section). Also, the seatback can be re-clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-hicle is stopped.

WRS0163



Seat lifter (driver’s seat)Push the front or rear end of the switch up ordown to adjust the angle and height of the seatcushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up or downto adjust the seat lumbar area.

2ND ROW BENCH SEATADJUSTMENT

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever andlean back.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for addedcomfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in thissection). Also, the seatback can be reclined toallow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped.

WRS0164 WRS0389

Outboard seatsWRS0468



WARNING

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.


● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat and adjust the seat belt properly.See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later in this section.

Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd rowThe outboard seating positions on the 2nd rowbench seat can be tipped forward for easy entryor exit from the 3rd row bench seat. To enter the3rd row s1 lift up on the latch located on theupper corner of the seatback on the 2nd rowbench seat and fold the seatback forward at anangle over the seat base. This will release theback of the seat so it may be tipped forward.

Then s2 lift up on the lower corner of the seatbase and tip the outboard seating position of the2nd row bench seat forward. To exit the 3rd rowbench seat lift up on the same latch and fold theseatback forward onto the seat base. Then lift upon the seat base and tip it forward.

WRS0469 LRS0331



HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENTTo raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,push and hold the lock knob and push the headrestraint down.

The head restraints on the 2nd and 3rd row seatsare removable.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-erly as they may provide significant pro-tection against injury in an accident. Donot remove them. Check the adjustmentafter someone else uses the seat.

Adjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of your ears.

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (frontseats)

WARNING

● Always adjust the head restraints prop-erly as specified in this section. Failureto do so can reduce the effectiveness ofthe active head restraint.

● Active head restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system canprevent all injuries in any accident.

WRS0470 WRS0134 SPA1025



● Do not attach anything to the head re-straint stalks. Doing so could impairactive head restraint function.

The head restraint moves forward utilizing theforce that the seatback receives from the occu-pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of thehead restraint helps support the occupant’s headby reducing its backward movement and helpingabsorb some of the forces that may lead to whip-lash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active head restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints as de-scribed earlier in this section.

ARMREST

To use the center armrest on the 2nd row benchseat, pull on the tab in the center of the seat andfold it down to the resting position.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seats when they arein the fold-down position. In a collision,people riding in these areas withoutproper restraints are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. Be sure everyonein your vehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.

● Do not fold down the rear seats whenoccupants are in the rear seat area orany luggage is on the rear seats.

● Head restraints should be adjustedproperly as they may provide significantprotection against injury in an accident.Always replace and adjust them prop-erly if they have been removed for anyreason.

● If the head restraints are removed forany reason, they should be securelystored to prevent them from causinginjury to passengers or damage to thevehicle in case of sudden braking or anaccident.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

LRS0514



● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seatbacks.In a sudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

Folding the front passenger’s seatback(if so equipped)To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat forextra storage length when transporting longitems:

s1 Slide the seat to the rear-most position. Liftup on the recline lever, located on the out-side edge of the seat, and fold the seatbackforward as far as it will go. Then lift up on thelatch located on the upper corner of theseatback to release the back of the seat.

s2 Once the seatback is released it will enableyou to fold the front passenger seatback flatover the seat cushion.

3. To return the front passenger’s seat to aseating position lift up on the seatback andpush it up to an upright position. Then pull upon the recline lever and lean the seatback toa proper seating position. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

LRS0608 LRS0609



WARNING

● If you fold the front passenger’s seat-back flat forward to carry longer ob-jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-cured and not near an air bag. In acrash, an inflating air bag might forcethat object toward a person. This couldcause severe injury or even death. Se-cure objects away from the area inwhich an air bag would inflate. See“Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem” later in this section.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the front passenger’s seatwhen it is in the fold-down position. Useof these areas by passengers could re-sult in serious injury in an accident orsudden stop.

Folding the 2nd row bench seatTo fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximumcargo hauling:

s1 Lower the head restraints to the full “down”position. Pull the strap forward, located inthe center of each seat cushion, and foldeach seat cushion toward the front of thevehicle.

s2 Then lift up on the recline lever on the side ofthe outboard seats to fold the outboard seat-backs flat. To fold the center seatback flat,pull up on the strap on the edge of the centerseat cushion and fold the seatback towardthe front of the vehicle.

WRS0472 LRS0494



s3 There is a carpet panel flap on the back ofeach seat that can be folded toward theback of the vehicle

s4 The carpet panel flap provides a level cargofloor when the 3rd row seats are also foldedflat.

5. To return the outboard 2nd row bench seatsto a seating position reverse the process forthe outboard seats.

6. To return the center seat to a seating posi-tion, lift up on the pull strap on the back ofthe seat base while lifting on the seatback.Then push the seat cushion back into place.Make sure to properly raise the seat-back to an upright position and pushthe seat cushion down into place.

Folding the 3rd row seatsTo fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargocapacity:

1. Make sure that the head restraints are low-ered.

2. Stow the third row seat belts in the seat belthooks found on the sides of the cargo area.See “Seat belt hook” later in this section.

3. Pull up on the latch located in the uppercorner of each seatback and lower the seat-back forward over the seat base.

LRS0658 WRS0471 LRS0653



To return the 3rd row seats to a seating positionuse the pull straps to raise each seatback. Pullback until the seatbacks latch into position.Make sure to properly raise each seatbackto an upright and secured position.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS



WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016



WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● Once the pre-tensioner seat belt hasactivated, it cannot be reused and mustbe replaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system componentsshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

SSS0014



There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear facing child restraint

● Front facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rearfacing child restraints. Front facing child re-straints are available for children who outgrowrear facing child restraints and are at least 1 yearold. Booster seats are used to help position avehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can nolonger use a front facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. See “Child Re-straints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraintsavailable for larger children for additional protec-tion.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

InfantsInfants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Small ChildrenChildren that are over one year old and weigh atleast 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward

facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for minimum and maximum weightand height recommendations. NISSAN recom-mends that small children be placed in childrestraints that comply with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose a childrestraint that fits your vehicle and always followthe manufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs(18 kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat shouldbe used to obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt in the child’s seating position fits close tothe face or neck or if the lap portion of the seatbelt goes across the abdomen. The booster seatshould raise the child so that the shoulder belt isproperly positioned across the top, middle por-tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on thehips. A booster seat can only be used in seatingpositions that have a three-point type seat belt.The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and



have a label certifying that it complies with Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the childhas grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on ornear the face and neck, use the shoulder beltwithout the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoareas while the vehicle is moving. Thechild could be seriously injured or killed inan accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,and always position the lap belt as low as pos-sible around the hips, not the waist. Place theshoulder belt over your shoulder and across yourchest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over yourabdominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.


● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

s1 Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in thissection.

Manual front seat shownWRS0174



s2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion permits the seat belt tomove, and allows you some freedom ofmovement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Then smoothlypull the belt out of the retractor.

s3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

s4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions three-point seat belts have a lockingmechanism for child restraint installation. It isreferred to as the automatic locking mode or childrestraint mode.

When automatic locking mechanism is activatedthe seat belt cannot be extended again until theseat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and

fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is inthe emergency locking mode. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a passen-ger, the locking mode should not be acti-vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-fortable seat belt tension. It can alsochange the operation of the front passen-ger air bag. See “Front passenger air bagand status light” later in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0137 WRS0138



Unfastening the seat belts

s1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows.

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (frontand 2nd row outboard seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, pull out s1 the adjustment button andmove the shoulder belt anchor s2 to the desiredposition, so the belt passes over the center of theshoulder. The belt should be away from your faceand neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulderbelt anchor into position.

WRS0139Front and 2nd row outboard seats

LRS0242



WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

Seat belt hook

When the seat belt is not in use and when foldingdown the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts onthe seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender is available which iscompatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oflength and may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. See a NISSANdealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply amild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

LRS0515



● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint can re-sult in serious injury or death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS



● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be usedin the rear seat.

● NISSAN recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat. Ifyou must install a front facing child re-straint in the front seat, see “Child re-straint installation using the seat belts”later in this section.

● Improper use or improper installationof a child restraint can increase the riskor severity of injury for both the childand other occupants of the vehicle andcan lead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

● Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child re-straint, be sure to select one which willfit your child and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install some typesof child restraints in your vehicle.

● If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being in-jured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

● After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the seatnear the LATCH attachment or by theseat belt path. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the belt holds the re-straint in place. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 inch (25mm). If the restraint is not secure,tighten the belt as necessary, or put therestraint in another seat and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint. Not all child restraints fitin all types of vehicles.

● When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH Systemor a seat belt to prevent it from beingthrown around in case of a sudden stopor accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the childrestraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint lower anchor system, referred to as theLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Systemor LATCH. Some child restraints include two rigidor webbing-mounted attachments that can beconnected to these lower anchors. For details,see the “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildrenSystem (LATCH)” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See“Child restraint installation using the seat belts”later in this section. In general, child restraints arealso designed to be installed with the lap portionof a lap/shoulder seat belt.



Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and small children of various sizes. Whenselecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchorsand Tethers for CHildren) system compatiblechild restraints.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to installchild restraints in the 2nd row outboard seatingpositions only. Do not attempt to install a childrestraint in the center position using the LATCHanchors.

LATCH lower anchor point locations

The LATCH system anchors are located at therear of the seat cushion near the seatback. Alabel is attached to the seatback to help youlocate the LATCH system anchors.

WARNING

● Attach LATCH system compatible childrestraints only at the locations shown. Ifa child restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

LATCH system anchor locationsWRS0416

LATCH label locations 2nd row benchWRS0467



● The LATCH system anchors are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

Installing child restraint LATCH anchorattachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt tosecure the child restraint. Check your child re-straint for a label stating that it is compatible withthe LATCH system. This information may also bein the instructions provided by the child restraintmanufacturer.

LATCH child restraints generally require the useof a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap childrestraint” later in this section for installation in-structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint. See “Childrestraint installation using LATCH System” in thissection.

LATCH lower anchor locationWRS0700

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662



TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINTIf the manufacturer of your child restraint requiresthe use of a top tether strap, it must be secured tothe anchor point.

WARNING

● Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

● The child restraint top tether strap maybe damaged by contact with items inthe cargo area. Secure any items in thecargo area. Your child could be seri-ously injured or killed in a collision ifthe top tether strap is damaged.

Top Tether Anchor Point LocationsAnchor points are located in the following loca-tions:

● 2nd row bench on the floor behind the out-board seating positions as shown.

● 2nd row bench center seatback as shown.

If you have any questions when installing atop strap child restraint on the rear seat,consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

Installing top tether strap

First, secure the child restraint with the seat beltor the LATCH system (rear outboard seat posi-tions only), as applicable.

1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

For the 2nd row bench seat, install the top tetherstrap as follows:

1. Position the top tether strap over the top ofthe head restraint with the head restraint inthe full “down” position.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint on the seat directly behind the childrestaint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

For best child restraint fit, see the child restraintinstallation instructions in this section and thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING LATCH

WARNING

● Attach LATCH compatible child re-straints only at the locations shown. Forthe LATCH lower anchor locations, see“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-dren System (LATCH)” in this section. Ifa child restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

● The LATCH anchors are designed towithstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Underno circumstance are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.

2nd row bench seatLRS0659



● Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH anchors,such as seat belt webbing or seat cush-ion material. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the LATCH an-chors are obstructed.

Front-facingFollow these steps to install a front-facing childrestraint in the 2nd row seats using LATCH:

1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is ad-justable to assist in attaching the child re-straint to the lower anchors.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

4. Return the seatback to its normal uprightand locked position.

The back of the child restraint should be securedagainst the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjustor remove the head restraint to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-ment” in this section. If the head restraint is re-moved, store it in a secure place. Be sure toinstall the head restraint when the child restraintis removed. If the seating position does not havean adjustable head restraint and it is interfering

with the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

Check to make sure it is not contacting frontseats and preventing it from being properly se-cured. If you are unable to properly secure thechild restraint, move it to another seating positionor try a different child restraint.

Front facing web-mounted – step 3LRS0663

Front facing rigid-mounted – step 3LRS0664



5. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

6. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Top tether strap child restraint” inthis section.

7. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-tachment and use force to push the childrestraint from side to side, and tug it forwardto make sure that it is securely held in place.It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). Ifit does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pullagain on the anchor attachments to furthertighten the child restraint. If you are unable toproperly secure the restraint, move the re-straint to another seating position and tryagain, or try a different child restraint. Not allchild restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

8. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 4through 7.

Front facing – step 5LRS0671

Front facing – step 7WRS0697



Rear-facingFollow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint in the 2nd row seats using LATCH Sys-tem:

1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is ad-justable to assist in attaching the child re-straint to the lower anchors.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

4. Return the seatback to its normal uprightand locked position.

Check to make sure it is not contacting frontseats and preventing it from being properly se-cured. If you are unable to properly secure thechild restraint, move it to another seating positionor try a different child restraint.

5. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourhand to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

Rear facing web-mounted – step 3LRS0665

Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 3LRS0666



6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-tachment and use force to push the childrestraint from side to side, and tug it forwardto make sure that it is securely held in place.It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). Ifit does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pullagain on the anchor attachments to furthertighten the child restraint. If you are unable toproperly secure the restraint, move the re-straint to another seating position and tryagain, or try a different child restraint. Not allchild restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 3through 6.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front passengerseat. Supplemental front air bags in-flate with great force. A rear-facingchild restraint could be struck by thesupplemental front air bag in a crashand could seriously injure or kill yourchild.

Rear facing – step 5LRS0673

Rear facing – step 6LRS0674 WRS0256



● NISSAN recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position. Also, be surethe front passenger air bag status lightis illuminated to indicate the passengerair bag is OFF. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this sec-tion for details.

● The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision. Also, it canchange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. See “Front passengerair bag and status light” later in thissection.

● A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front passen-ger seat.

The instructions in this section apply to childrestraint installation using the vehicle seat belts inthe rear seat or the front passenger seat.

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rearseats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in afront-facing direction only. Move theseat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used inthe rear-facing direction and thereforemust not be used in the front seat.

Front-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1WRS0699



2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions

The back of the child restraint should be securedagainst the vehicle seat back. If necessary, adjustor remove the head restraint to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-ment” in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to install the head restraintwhen the child restraint is removed. If the seatingposition does not have an adjustable head re-straint and it is interfering with the proper childrestraint fit, try another seating position or a dif-ferent child restraint.

When installing a child restraint in the 2nd or 3rdrow, check to make sure that it is not contactingthe seat directly in front of it. If you are unable toproperly secure the child restraint, move it toanother seating position or try a different childrestraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

4. Pull on the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the automatic locking mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to emergency lock-ing mode when the seat belt is fully re-tracted.





5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Top tether strap child restraint” inthis section. Do not install child restraintsthat require the use of a top tether strap toseating positions that do not have a toptether anchor.






8. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the seat beltpath and use force to push the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward to makesure that it is securely held in place. It shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If itdoes move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pullagain on the shoulder belt to further tightenthe child restraint. If you are unable to prop-erly secure the restraint, move the restraintto another seating position and try again, ortry a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore belt webbing out of the retractor, theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 8.

11. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, turn the ignition switch tothe ON position. The passenger air bag sta-tus light should illuminate. If this lightis not illuminated see 9Front passenger airbag and status light9 in this section. Movethe child restraint to another seatingposition. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the automatic locking modechild restraint mode) is canceled.

Rear-facingFollow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

When installing a child restraint in the 2nd or 3rdrow, check to make sure that it is not contacting theseat directly in front of it. If you are unable to properlysecure the child restraint, move it to another seatingposition or try a different child restraint.


Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256



2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the automatic locking mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to emergency lock-ing mode when the seat belt is fully re-tracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Rear facing – step 2WRS0682





5. Remove any additional slack from the childrestraint; press downward and rearwardfirmly in the center of the child restraint tocompress the vehicle seat cushion and seat-back while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the seat beltpath and use force to push the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward to makesure that it is securely held in place. It shouldnot move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it doesmove more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again onthe shoulder belt to further tighten the childrestraint. If you are unable to properly securethe restraint, move the restraint to anotherrear seating position and try again, or try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore seat belt webbing out of the retractor,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If the beltis not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the automatic locking modechild restraint mode) is canceled.





PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTERSEATS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint orbooster seat can result in serious injuryor death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● NISSAN recommends that the boosterseat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat. Ifyou must install a booster seat in thefront seat, see “Booster seat installa-tion” in this section.

● A booster seat must only be installed ina seating position that has alap/shoulder belt. Failure to use athree-point type seat belt with abooster seat can result in a serious in-jury in sudden stop or collision.

● Improper use or improper installationof a booster seat can increase the riskor severity of injury for both the childand other occupants of the vehicle andcan lead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

● Do not use towels, books, pillows orother items in place of a booster seat.Items such as these may move duringnormal driving or a collision and resultin serious injury or death. Booster seatsare designed to be used with alap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-signed to properly route the lap andshoulder portions of the seat belt overthe strongest portions of a child’s bodyto provide the maximum protection dur-ing a collision.

● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a booster seat,be sure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be possibleto properly install some types ofbooster seats in your vehicle.

● If the booster seat and seat belt is notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the booster seat, but asupright as possible.

ARS1098

BOOSTER SEATS



● After placing the child in the boosterseat and fastening the seat belt, makesure the shoulder portion of the belt isaway from the child’s face and neck andthe lap portion of the belt does notcross the abdomen.

● Do not put the shoulder belt behind thechild or under the child’s arm. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation”later in this section.

● When your booster seat is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the boosterseat.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat s1 is chosen, thevehicle seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seat back islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat s2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with yourchild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and small

LRS0455 LRS0453



children be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

WARNING

NISSAN recommends that booster seatsbe installed in the rear seat. However, ifyou must install a booster seat in the frontpassenger seat, move the passenger’sseat to the rearmost position.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt auto-matic locking mode when using a boosterseat with the seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

LRS0464 WRS0699



3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-sary, adjust or remove the head restraint toobtain the correct booster seat fit. See“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in thissection. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the booster seat isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper booster seat fit,try another seating position or a differentbooster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting thebelt routing.

Rear center positionLRS0504

Rear outboard positionLRS0502



6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in the “Three-point seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, turn the ignition switch tothe ON position. The passenger air bag sta-tus light may or may not be illumi-nated, depending on the size of the child andthe type of booster seat being used. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe driver and passenger supplemental front airbags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System),supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impactand rollover air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system:The NISSAN advanced air bag system can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Supplemental side-impact air bag system(if so equipped): This system can help cushionthe impact force to the chest area of the driverand front passenger in certain side impact colli-sions. The supplemental side air bag is designedto inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-pacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact and roll-over air bag system (if so equipped): Thissystem can help cushion the impact force to thehead of occupants in front and rear outboardseating positions in certain side impact or rollovercollisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bagsare designed to inflate on the side where the

Front passenger positionLRS0454 WRS0475

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM



vehicle is impacted. In a rollover both curtain airbags are designed to inflate and remain inflatedfor a short time.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the seat belts and are not a substitutefor them. Seat belts should always be correctlyworn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-tance away from the steering wheel, instrumentpanel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlierin this section for instructions and precautions onseat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

● The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, rollover, orlower severity frontal collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

WRS0031



● The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat. The front air bags inflate withgreat force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre-strained, leaning forward, sitting side-ways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the supplementalfront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. Theadvanced air bag system monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front Passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when thesupplemental front air bag inflates.



WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041



WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags, side air bags or curtain side-impact and rollover air bags inflate ifthey are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properlyrestrained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044



WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. See“Child restraints” earlier in this sectionfor details.

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag (if so equipped)and curtain side-impact and rollover airbag (if so equipped):

● The supplemental side air bag and cur-tain side-impact and rollover air bagordinarily will not inflate in the event ofa frontal impact, rear impact, or lowerseverity side collision. Always wearyour seat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256Do not lean against doors or windows.

WRS0431



WARNING

● The seat belts, the supplemental sideair bags and curtain side-impact androllover air bags are most effectivewhen you are sitting well back and up-right in the seat. The side air bag andcurtain air bag inflate with great force.Do not allow anyone to place theirhand, leg or face near the side air bagon the side of the seatback of the frontseat or near the side roof rails. Do notallow anyone sitting in the front seats orrear outboard seats to extend theirhand out of the window or lean againstthe door. Some examples of dangerousriding positions are shown in the previ-ous illustrations.

Do not lean against doors or windows.WRS0365

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162



WARNING

● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, donot hold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the side air bag inflates, you maybe seriously injured. Be especially care-ful with children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withsupplemental side air bag inflation.

WRS0363 SSS0159



1. SRS curtain side-impact and rollover airbag modules (if so equipped)

2. SRS curtain side-impact and rollover airbag (if so equipped)

3. Diagnosis sensor unit4. Supplemental front air bag modules5. Crash zone sensor6. Occupant classification system control

unit7. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor)8. Satellite sensors9. Seat belt buckle switches10. Pre-tensioner retractor11. Supplemental side air bag modules

(if so equipped)

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad-vanced air bag system for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.

WRS0474



The driver supplemental front air bag is located inthe center of the steering wheel. The passengersupplemental front air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box. The supplemen-tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental front air bagsystem operation.

The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit,seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seatbelt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based onthe severity of a collision and seat belt usage forthe driver. For the front passenger, it additionallymonitors the weight of an occupant or object onthe seat and seat belt tension. Based on informa-tion from the sensors, only one front air bag mayinflate in a crash, depending on the crash severityand whether the front occupants are belted orunbelted. Additionally, the front passenger airbag may be automatically turned OFF undersome conditions, depending on the weight de-tected on the passenger seat and how the seatbelt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will notbe illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See“Front passenger air bag and status light” later inthis section for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper performanceof the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag inflates, afairly loud noise may be heard, followed by therelease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful anddoes not indicate a fire. Care should be taken tonot inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-ing. Those with a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants. Theycan help save lives and reduce serious injuries.However, an inflating front air bag may causefacial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-

senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thesupplemental front air bags inflate quickly in orderto help protect the front occupants. Because ofthis, the force of the front air bag inflating canincrease the risk of injury if the occupant is tooclose to, or is against, the front air bag moduleduring inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The supplemental front air bags operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.




Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light islocated near the climate controls. The light oper-ates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The isOFF and the front passenger air bag is OFFand will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The illuminates to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is OFF andwill not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-tion: The light is OFF to indicate thatthe front passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the frontpassenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is designed todetect an occupant and objects on the seat byweight. It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child is in thefront passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys-tem is designed to turn the passenger air bagOFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if achild restraint of the type specified in the regula-tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’sweight can be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-tion can vary depending on the front passengerseat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the automatic locking mode (child restraintmode). Based on the weight on the seat detectedby the occupant classification sensor and the belttension detected on the seat belt, the advancedair bag system determines whether the front pas-senger air bag should be automatically turnedOFF as required by the regulations.

WRS0475



Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF, however if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode), this couldcause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always besure to be seated and wearing the seat beltproperly for the most effective protection by theseat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor and seat belt sensors aredesigned to operate as described above to turnthe front passenger air bag OFF for specifiedchild restraints as required by the regulations.Failing to properly secure child restraints and touse the automatic locking mode (child restraintmode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in anaccident or sudden stop. This can also result inthe passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead

of being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in thissection for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If the airbag status light is not illuminated (indicating thatthe air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be

that the child restraint or seat belt is not beingused properly. Make sure that the child restraint isinstalled properly, the seat belt is used properlyand the occupant is positioned properly. If the airbag status light is not illuminated, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-minate even though you believe that the childrestraint, the seat belts and the occupant areproperly positioned, the system may be sensingan unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isOFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a special tool. However,until you have confirmed with your dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. For example, if alarge adult who is sitting in the front passengerseat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagstatus light will go from OFF to ON for a fewseconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemoperation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges areain the center of the instrument panel, will blink.Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.



Other supplemental front air bag precau-tions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the supplemen-tal front air bag inflates.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe supplemental front air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental frontair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly by placingmaterial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel or byinstalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (pressure sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thesupplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the seat belt systemmay result in serious personal injury.

● Work on and around the supplementalfront air bag system should be done bya NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-cal equipment should also be done by aNISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring should notbe modified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

● The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental front airbag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.



Supplemental side-impact air bag (ifso equipped) and curtain side-impactand rollover air bags (if so equipped)system

The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo-cated in the outside of the seatback of the frontseats. The supplemental curtain side-impact androllover air bags are located in the side roof railsin all 3 rows. These systems are designed to meetvoluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk ofinjury to out-of-position occupants. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed. The supplemental side air bags and

curtain side-impact and rollover air bags are de-signed to inflate in higher severity side collisions,although they may inflate if the forces in anothertype of collision are similar to those of a higherseverity side impact. They are designed to inflateon the side where the vehicle is impacted. Theymay not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain side-impact and rollover air bags are alsodesigned to inflate in certain types of rollovercollisions or near rollovers.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental side air bagand curtain side-impact and rollover air bag op-eration.

When the supplemental side air bag and curtainair bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smoke is notharmful and does not indicate a fire. Care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritationand choking. Those with a history of a breathingcondition should get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe chest of the front occupants. Curtain side-impact and rollover air bags help to cushion theimpact force to the head of occupants in the frontand rear outboard seating positions in all rows.They can help save lives and reduce seriousinjuries. However, an inflating side air bag, or

curtain air bag may cause abrasions or otherinjuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact and rollover air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the supplemental side airbag. Rear seat passengers should be seated asfar away as practical from the door finishers andside roof rails. The side air bags and curtain airbag inflate quickly in order to help protect theoccupants. Because of this, the force of the sideair bag and curtain air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, oris against, these air bag modules during inflation.The side air bag will deflate quickly after thecollision is over.

The curtain side-impact and rollover air bag willremain inflated for a short time.

The supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact and rollover air bags operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ONor START positions.


WRS0381



WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if the supplemental side airbag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain side-impact and rollover airbag system components will be hot. Donot touch them; you may severely burnyourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain air bagsystem. This is to prevent accidentalinflation of the side air bag and curtainair bag or damage to the side air bagand curtain air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thesupplemental curtain air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental sideair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial near the seatbacks or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, around the side air bag.

● Work around and on the curtain air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag or cur-tain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors areyellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental side airbag and curtain air bag system and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot bereused after activation. It must be re-placed together with the retractor andbuckle as a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but the pre-tensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by your NISSANdealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt system. Thisis to prevent accidental activation ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt or damageto the pre-tensioner seat belt operation.Tampering with the pre-tensioner seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.



● Work around and on the pre-tensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pre-tensioner seatbelt system.

● If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensionerdisposal procedures are set forth in theappropriate NISSAN Service Manual.Incorrect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt systemactivates in conjunction with the front supple-mental air bag systems. Working with the seatbelt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt whenthe vehicle becomes involved in certain types ofcollisions, helping to restrain front seat occu-pants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’sretractor. These seat belts are used the same asconventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated,load limiters allow the seat belt to release web-bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against thechest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensionersystem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will not come on, will flash intermit-tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain onafter the ignition key has been turned to the ON orSTART position. In this case, the pre-tensionerseat belt may not function properly. They must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem and guide the buyer to the appropriatesections in this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-face of the sun visor.

2. SRS Side air bag warning label (if soequipped)

The warning label is located on the side ofthe passenger’s side center pillar.

LRS0397



SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front airbags and supplemental side-impact and rolloverair bag systems are placed in the vehicle asshown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag,supplemental side-impact air bag and curtainside-impact and rollover air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt systems. The circuits moni-tored by the supplemental air bag warning lightare the diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor,satellite sensors, rollover sensor, front air bagmodules, side air bag modules, curtain air bagmodules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all relatedwiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bag, supplemental side airbag, curtain air bag and pre-tensioner seat beltsystems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental frontair bag, supplemental side air bags and curtain airbag or pre-tensioner seat belt systems may notoperate properly. It must be checked and re-paired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSANdealer.

LRS0100



WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not oper-ate in an accident. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplementalside air bags, curtain air bags and pre-tensionerseat belts are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged,the supplemental air bag warning light remainsilluminated after inflation has occurred. Repairand replacement of these supplemental air bagsystems should be done only by a NISSANdealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple-mental side air bags, curtain air bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related parts should bepointed out to the person performing the mainte-nance. The ignition key should always be in theLOCK position when working under the hood orinside the vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag or curtain airbag has inflated, the air bag module willnot function again and must be re-placed. Additionally, if any of thesupplemental front air bags inflate, theactivated pre-tensioner seat belts mustalso be replaced. The air bag moduleand pre-tensioner seat belt systemshould be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.The air bag module and pre-tensionerseat belt system cannot be repaired.

● The supplemental front air bag, side airbag and curtain air bag systems, andthe pre-tensioner seat belt systemshould be inspected by a NISSANdealer if there is any damage to thefront end or side portion of the vehicle.

● If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat beltsystem or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct supplementalair bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem disposal procedures are set forth inthe appropriate NISSAN ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.




MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Compass and outside temperature display(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-13Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-29Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Storage bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-362nd row under-seat storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39


Seat pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Cargo area storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Cargo nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

Sunroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Automatic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Personal lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52HomeLinkT universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-53

Programming HomeLinkT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Programming HomeLinkT for Canadiancustomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55Operating the HomeLinkT universaltransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button . . . . . . 2-55If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56


1. Ventilators (P. 4-14)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-27)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) (P. 4-48)4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-39, P. 2-32)5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-3, 2-13)6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-15)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-24, P. 2-25)

8. Storage (P. 2-35)9. Audio system controls (P. 4-26)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-39)11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-38)12. Power outlet (P. 2-34)13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-32)14. Hill descent control switch (if so

equipped) (P. 2-33)15. Shift selector lever (P. 5-11)16. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-33)WIC0877

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls


17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)(P. 5-18)

18. Climate controls (P. 4-15, 4-22)19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-49)20. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-31)21. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)22. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-12)23. Pedal position adjustment switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-12)24. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-16)25. Navigation system and controls*

(if so equipped) (P. 4-2)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

1. Warning/indicator lights2. Tachometer3. Speedometer4. Fuel gauge5. Voltmeter

6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Trip com-puter (if so equipped)

7. Engine oil pressure gauge8. Engine coolant temperature gauge

WIC1040

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3


1. Speedometer2. Odometer/twin trip display3. Change buttonSPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates vehicle speed in milesper hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition key is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display:

For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer,pushing the change button changes the displayas follows:

Trip → Trip → Trip

WIC0912With twin trip odometer

LIC0780


Z REVIEW COPY—2007 Pathfinder (pat)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)10/16/06—cathy X

For vehicles equipped with trip computer, push-ing the change button changes the display asfollows:

Trip → Trip → Distance to Empty →Average speed → Average fuel consumption →Journey time → Trip

For additional information, refer to “Trip com-puter” later in this section.

For vehicles equipped with navigation system,refer to “How to use the ’trip’ button” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audiosystems” section later in this manual.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-ond resets the trip odometer to zero.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)

The display of the trip computer is situated in thespeedometer display. When the ignition is turnedto ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the tripcomputer and then shows the mode chosen be-fore the ignition switch was turned OFF.

When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modesof the trip computer can be selected by pushingthe trip computer change button. The followingmodes can be selected:

Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in thefuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warningfeature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode isautomatically selected and the digits blink in or-der to draw the driver’s attention. Press thechange button if you wish to return to the mode

that was selected before the warning occurred.The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until thevehicle is refueled.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dtedisplay will change to (----).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while theignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-play just before the ignition switch isturned OFF may continue to be dis-played.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves,the fuel in the tank shifts, which maymomentarily change the display.

Average speed (MPH or km/h)The average speed mode shows the averagevehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is doneby pressing the change button for more thanapproximately 1 second. The display is updatedevery 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after areset, the display shows (----).

Average fuel consumption (Mpg orl/100km)The average fuel consumption mode shows theaverage fuel consumption since the last reset.Resetting is done by pressing the change button

With trip computerLIC0781



for more than approximately 1 second. The dis-play is updated every 30 seconds. At about thefirst 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the displayshows (----).

Journey timeThe journey time mode shows the time since thelast reset. The displayed time can be reset bypressing the change button for more than ap-proximately 1 second.

Trip computer resetPushing the change button for more than 3 sec-onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis-tance to empty (dte).

TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engineinto the red zone s1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause seriousengine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range s1 when the gauge needle pointswithin the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

LIC0738 LIC0739



CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function indicator light (MIL)” later inthis section.

LIC0740



ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-tem oil pressure while the engine is running.

CAUTION

● This gauge is not designed to indicatelow engine oil level. Use the dipstick tocheck the oil level. (See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.)

● If the gauge needle does not move withthe proper amount of engine oil, havethe vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer. Continued vehicle operation insuch a condition could cause seriousdamage to the engine.

VOLTMETERWhen the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-tion, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage.When the engine is running, it indicates the gen-erator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop belowthe normal range. If the needle is not in the normalrange (11 – 15 volts) s1 while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the charging systemis not functioning properly. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

LIC0741 WIC0913



This unit has the following functions:

● Measures terrestrial magnetism and indi-cates heading direction of vehicle

● Indicates outside air temperature

With the ignition switch in the ON position, pressthe or button as described in thecharts below to activate various features of theautomatic anti-glare review mirror.Type A

Push and holdthebutton for about:

Feature:(Push button again for about 1 sec-ond to change settings)

1 secondCompass/outside temperature dis-play toggles on/off

5 secondsOutside temperature display togglesbetween °C and °F

8 secondsAutomatic anti-glare/indicator lighttoggles on/off

11 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

13 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

Type B



1 secondCompass/outside temperature dis-play toggles on/off

3 secondsOutside temperature display togglesbetween °F and °C

8 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glarefeature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section. OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

Push the or button for about 1 sec-ond when the ignition key is in the ON position totoggle the outside temperature and compassdirection display s1 on or off.

● To change from °F to °C, push and holdthe button for about 5 seconds orthe button for about 3 seconds untilthe display begins to flash. Press the buttonagain to toggle between °C and °F.

Type AWIC0904

COMPASS AND OUTSIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY (if soequipped)



● When the outside temperature is between140°F (60°C) and 194°F (90°C), the displaywill read 140°F (60°C). When the tempera-ture is above 194°F (90°C), the display willread “SC”.

● When the outside temperature is betweenthan -40°F (-40°C) and -60°F (-51°C), thedisplay will read -40°F (-40°C). When thetemperature is below -60°F (-51°C), the dis-play will read “OC”.

● The outside temperature sensor is located infront of the radiator. The sensor may beaffected by road or engine heat, wind direc-

tion and other driving conditions. The displaymay differ from the actual outside tempera-ture or the temperature displayed on varioussigns or billboards.

COMPASS DISPLAYPush the or button for about 1 sec-ond when the ignition key is in the ON position totoggle the outside temperature and compassdirection display s1 on or off. The display willindicate the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

N: NorthE: EastS: SouthW: West

If the display reads “CAL”, calibrate the compassby driving the vehicle in three complete circles atless than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by drivingyour vehicle on your everyday route. The com-pass will be calibrated once it has tracked threecomplete circles.

Type BLIC0583



Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-graphical north is known as variance. In someareas, this difference can sometimes be greatenough to cause false compass readings. Followthese instructions to set the variance for yourparticular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about11 seconds or the button for about 8seconds. The current zone number will ap-pear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the or the button repeat-edly to toggle through the zone numbersuntil the desired number appears in the dis-play. Once you have selected a zone num-ber, the display will show a compass direc-tion within a few seconds.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with automaticcorrection function. If the correct direction is notshown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and holdthe button for about 13 seconds orthe for about 10 seconds. The “CAL”icon in the compass display will illuminate.WIC0355



2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehiclein three complete circles at a maximumspeed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the displayshould return to normal.

CAUTION

● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect the op-eration of the compass.

● When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as it maycause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.



or Anti-lock braking system (ABS)warning light

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission oil temperature warn-ing light

Low windshield washer fluid warning light Hill descent control indicator light(if so equipped)

Automatic transmission park warning light( model)

Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Overdrive off indicator light

Charge warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light Security indicator light

Door open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light Transfer 4LO position indicator light( model)

4WD warning light ( model) 4WD shift indicator light ( model) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS



CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key to the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then gooff:

or , , , , , ,,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock brakingsystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning lightilluminates and then turns off. This indicates theABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while theengine is running, or while driving, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-tion is turned off. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance. See9Brake system9 in the 9Starting and driving9 sec-tion.

Automatic transmission oiltemperature warning light

This light comes on when the automatic transmis-sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comeson while driving, reduce the vehicle speed assoon as safely possible until the light turns off.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation when the A/Toil temperature warning light is on maydamage the automatic transmission.

Automatic transmission parkwarning light ( model)

WARNING

● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates thatthe automatic transmission P (Park) po-sition will not function and the transfercase is in neutral.

● When parking, always make sure thatthe 4WD shift indicator light illuminatesand the parking brake is set. Failure toengage the transfer position in 2WD,AUTO, 4H or 4LO could result in thevehicle moving unexpectedly, resultingin serious personal injury or propertydamage.

● Part time 4WD: Shift the 4WD switchinto the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position againto turn off the ATP warning light whenthe automatic transmission selector le-ver is in the P position and the ATPwarning light is ON. (Before shifting the4WD switch into the 4LO position, movethe automatic transmission selector le-ver into the N position once, shift theselector lever into P again and makesure the ATP warning light is OFF.)



● All mode 4WD: The warning light maycome on when the ignition switch is ONand the automatic transmission lever isshifted to the P position while shiftingthe transfer case between 4H and 4LO.Shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD,AUTO, 4H, or 4LO position again to turnoff the ATP warning light when thewarning light comes on. (Before shift-ing the 4WD switch into the 4LO posi-tion or out of 4LO in the 4H position,move the automatic transmission se-lector lever into the N position.) Shiftthe selector lever into the P positionand make sure that the 4WD shift indi-cator light is ON and the ATP warninglight is OFF.)

This light indicates that the automatic transmis-sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-fer control is not secured in any drive positionwhile the automatic transmission selector lever isin the P (Park) position, the transmission willdisengage and the drive wheels will not lock.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight warns of a low brake fluid level. If the lightcomes on while the engine is running with theparking brake not applied, stop the vehicle andperform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

● Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Doingso will bypass the variable control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely. Refer to “Variablevoltage control system” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section laterin this manual.



● Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are notclosed securely while the ignition key is in the ONposition.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

4WD warning light( model)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the keyswitch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after theengine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,the warning light will either remain illuminated orblink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Startingand driving” section.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksduring operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WDwarning light turns on when you aredriving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the4WD shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WDvehicles, stop the vehicle and shiftthe transmission selector lever to theN position with the brake pedal de-pressed and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for part time 4WDvehicles, stop the vehicle and shiftthe transmission selector lever to theN position with the brake pedal de-pressed and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

● If the warning light is still on after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuelin the tank when the fuel gauge needlereaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warninglight

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.



After the ignition switch is turned ON, this lightilluminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-sure, the warning light will illuminate. If you selectthe tire pressure information in the display (if soequipped), the LOW PRESSURE warning mes-sage will be displayed. The tire pressure for eachtire will also be displayed.

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres-sure to the recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Information label.The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressure isadjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom-mended pressure, the vehicle must be drivenover 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS andturn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use atire pressure gauge to adjust tire pressure to therecommended pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving”section and in the “In case of emergency”section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isturned ON. The light will remain on after the 1minute. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

For additional information, see “Tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WARNING

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch turned ON, have the ve-hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer assoon as possible.

● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident and couldresult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommended-COLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning lightOFF.If the light still illuminates whiledriving after adjusting the tire pressure,a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.



Low windshield washer fluidwarning light

This light comes on when the windshield washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluidas necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition key is turned to the ON or START positionand remains illuminated until the driver’s seat beltis fastened. At the same time, the chime soundsfor about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat beltis securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ONposition, the system does not activate the warn-ing light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bags, supplemental sideair bags (if so equipped), curtain side-impact androllover air bags, and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tems need servicing and your vehicle must betaken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioner seat belts may not function properly.For additional details see “Supplemental restraintsystem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain side-impact and rollover air bagsystems (if so equipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not oper-ate in an accident. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmissionposition indicator light

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-tion, this indicator light shows the automatictransmission selector lever position. See “Drivingthe vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.



Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

4WD shift indicator light( model)

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to ON.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator light will illuminate the position selected bythe 4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode to theother.

Front passenger air bagstatus light

The front passenger air bag status light ( )will be lit and the passenger front air bag will beOFF depending on how the front passenger seatis being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Hill descent control system onindicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is turned ON, this lightcomes on briefly and then turns off.

The light comes on when the hill descent controlsystem is activated.

If the HDC switch is on and the indicator lightblinks, the system is not engaged.

If the indicator light does not come on or blinkwhen the hill descent switch is on, the systemmay not be functioning properly. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Hill descent con-trol (HDC) switch” later in this section and “Hilldescent control (HDC) system” in the “Startingand driving” section of this manual.

Malfunction indicator light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also come onsteady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or ifthe vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make surethe fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly,and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.



Operation

The malfunction indicator light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction indicator light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. Ifthe fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tightenor install the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The light should turn off aftera few driving trips. If the light does notturn off after a few driving trips, have thevehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. Youdo not need to have your vehicle towed tothe dealer.

● Malfunction indicator light blinking — An en-gine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected

by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Overdrive off indicator light

This light comes on when the overdrive functionis OFF.

The automatic transmission overdrive function iscontrolled by the overdrive switch.

See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is inthe LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This functionindicates the security system equipped on thevehicle is operational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-tems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin. Slipperyroad conditions may exist if the slip indicatorblinks on. If this happens, adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when youturn the ignition key to the ON position. The lightwill turn off after about 2 seconds if the system isoperational. If the light does not come on or doesnot go off, have the traction control systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac-tion control system is disabled and the slip indi-cator light will not turn off after 2 seconds whenthe ignition switch is turned to the ON position.To reset the system, you must perform the resetprocedure. Refer to “Vehicle dynamic control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

If the light does not go off after performing thereset procedure, have the traction control systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

Transfer 4LO positionindicator light ( model)

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to ON.



This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch isset in the 4LO position with the ignition key in theON position.

The transfer case may be damaged if you shift theswitch while driving.

Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicatorlight turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switchto 4LO.

The indicator light may blink while shiftingfrom one drive mode to the other.

All mode 4WD (if so equipped)

If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO positionand the light blinks, stop the vehicle, drive slowlyforward and the light will turn on.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop thevehicle and shift the transmission selector leverto the N position with the brake pedal depressed,then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to4LO or 4H.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switchbetween 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicleand shift the transmission selector lever to the Nposition with the brake pedal depressed.

Part time 4WD (if so equipped)

The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking andremain illuminated or turn off before shifting the

transmission into gear. If the transmission selec-tor lever is shifted from the N position to any othergear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, thevehicle may move unexpectedly.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop thevehicle and shift the transmission selector leverto the N position with the brake pedal depressed,then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to4LO or 4H.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switchbetween 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicleand shift the transmission selector lever to the Nposition with the brake pedal depressed.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle dynamic control offindicator light

This indicator light comes on when the vehicledynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF, thetransfer case is in the 4LO position (model), or when the vehicle dynamic control sys-

tem is not functioning properly. This indicates thevehicle dynamic control system is not operating.

Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch againor restart the engine and the system will operatenormally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)system” in the “Starting and driving” section ofthis manual.

The vehicle dynamic control light also comes onwhen you turn the ignition key to the ON position.The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if thesystem is operational. If the light stays on orcomes on along with the SLIP indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the vehicle dynamiccontrol system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the ve-hicle dynamic control system is disabled and theVDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 sec-onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition. To reset the system, you must performthe reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle dynamiccontrol (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section of this manual.

If the light does not go off after performing thereset procedure, have the traction control systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the vehicle dynamic control system is op-erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the



system working when starting the vehicle or ac-celerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch in the OFF position, achime sounds when the driver’s door is opened ifthe headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorswhen the system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that activates whena vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows and the glass hatch. (Thesystem can be armed even if the win-dows are open. However, the glasshatch must be closed.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with the key, power door lockswitch or with the keyfob.

Keyfob operation:

● Push the button on the keyfob.All doors lock. The hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once to indicateall doors are locked.

WIC0841

SECURITY SYSTEMS



● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” (vehicleswithout navigation system) in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section or“Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles withnavigation system) in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner and audio systems”section.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comeson. The light stays on for about 30seconds. The vehicle security system is nowpre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-hicle security system automatically shiftsinto the armed phase. The light beginsto flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the30-second pre-arm time period, the door isunlocked by the key or the keyfob, or theignition key is turned to ACC or ON, thesystem will not arm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe door, the system may not arm. Fur-thermore, if the key is turned beyondthe vertical position toward the unlockposition to remove the key, the systemmay be disarmed when the key is re-

moved. If the indicator light fails toglow for 30 seconds, unlock the dooronce and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition key in the OFF posi-tion.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after ap-proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by unlockinga door with the key, or by pressing thebutton on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key orkeyfob (even if the door is unlocked by usingthe inside lock knob or the power door lockswitch).

● opening the glass hatch without unlockingthe lift gate.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’sdoor with the key, or by pressing the but-ton on the keyfob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.



If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACCposition. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

s1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knob towardsA (Slower) or sB (Faster). Also, the inter-mittent operation speed varies in accor-dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-tent operation speed will be faster.)

LIC0474 WIC0843

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH



NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the drivingspeed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion for vehicles with navigation system.Refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems”section later in this manual.

s2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

s3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up s4 to have one sweep opera-tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

The rear window wiper and washer operate whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF positionto operate the wiper.

s1 Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation(not adjustable)

s2 ON – continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward s3 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WIC0844

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH



WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the window and ob-scure your vision. Warm the rear windowwith the defroster before you wash therear window.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.



To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light comes on.Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

Type ALIC0782

Type BLIC0783

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH



HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

s1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

s2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Type ALIC0560

Type BLIC0687

Type CLIC0688

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH



Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds afteryou turn the key to OFF and all doors areclosed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and thetime delay for autolight shutoff is adjust-able for vehicles with navigation system.See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems”section later in this manual.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion s1 .

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and adoor is opened and left open, the headlightsremain ON for 5 minutes. If another door isopened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minutetimer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch tothe OFF, , or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor s1 located on the topside of the instrument panel. The autolightsensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it isdark out and the headlights will illuminate.If this occurs while parked with the engineoff and the key in the ON position, yourvehicle’s battery could become discharged.

LIC0561 LIC0835



Headlight beam select

s1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

s2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

s3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is turned OFF while theheadlight switch is in the or posi-tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

After the headlights automatically turn off with theheadlight switch in the or position,the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes ifthe headlight switch is moved to the OFF positionand then turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC0562



INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is inthe , or AUTO position (with auto-lights activated).

Turn the control sA to adjust the brightness ofinstrument panel lights when driving at night.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

s1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

s2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switchin the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch tothe position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

WIC0917 LIC0563 LIC0393



The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchin any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH



To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (ifso equipped).

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, asdesired, depending on the temperature. Theindicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switchoff.

CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

● If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

LIC0604 LIC1041

HORN HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)



The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle dy-namic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WARNING

● Never rely solely on the hill descentcontrol system to control vehicle speedwhen driving on steep downhill grades.Always drive carefully when using thehill descent control system and decel-erate the vehicle speed by depressingthe brake pedal if necessary. Be espe-cially careful when driving on frozen,muddy or extremely steep downhillroads. Failure to control vehicle speedmay result in a loss of control of thevehicle and possible serious injury ordeath.

● The hill descent control may not controlthe vehicle speed on a hill under all loador road conditions. Always be preparedto depress the brake pedal to controlvehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-sult in a collision or serious personalinjury.

CAUTION

When the hill descent control system op-erates continuously for a long time, thetemperature of the brake pads may in-crease and the hill descent control systemmay be temporarily disabled (the indicatorlight will blink). If the indicator light doesnot come on continuously after blinking,stop using the system.

The hill descent control system is designed toreduce driver workload when going down steephills. The hill descent control system helps tocontrol vehicle speed so the driver can concen-trate on steering the vehicle.

To activate the hill descent control system:

● the automatic transmission selector levermust be in forward or reverse gear,

● the 4WD switch must be in the 4L positionand the vehicle speed must be under 15mph (25 km/h) or

WIC0534 LIC0743

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (ifso equipped)



● the 4WD switch must be in the 4H positionand the vehicle speed must be under 21mph (35 km/h), and

● the hill descent control system switch mustbe ON.

The hill descent control indicator light will comeon when the system is activated. Also, thestop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descentcontrol system applies the brakes to control ve-hicle speed.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressedwhile the hill descent control system is on, thesystem will stop operating temporarily. As soonas the accelerator or brake pedal is released, thehill descent control system begins to functionagain if the hill descent control operating condi-tions are fulfilled.

The hill descent control indicator light blinks if theswitch is on and all conditions for system activa-tion are not met or if the system becomes disen-gaged for any reason.

To turn off the hill descent control system, pushthe switch to the OFF position.

For additional information, see “Hill descent con-trol system on indicator light” earlier in this sec-tion and “Hill descent control system” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones.

The bottom power outlet located on instrumentpanel and the power outlet located in the cargoarea are powered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

The top power outlet (if so equipped)located onthe instrument panel and the power outlet lo-cated inside the center console are powered onlywhen the ignition key is in the ACC or ON posi-tion.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● Only certain power outlets are designedfor use with a cigarette lighter unit. Donot use any other power outlet for anaccessory lighter. See your NISSANdealer for additional information.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

Front rowLIC0760

Center consoleLIC0761

POWER OUTLET



● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays tohelp prevent injury in an accident or sud-den stop.

Luggage area — Type ALIC0762

Luggage area — Type BLIC0763

Top center tray (if so equipped)LIC0764

STORAGE



STORAGE BINSBottom center tray (if so equipped)

LIC0767

Right-hand side 3rd row trayWIC0830

Front row binLIC0765



2ND ROW UNDER-SEAT STORAGEBINTo access the under-seat storage bins:

s1 Tip up the 2nd row bench seat. Refer to “Tipup for easy entry to the 3rd row” in the“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section earlier in thismanual.

s2 Fold up the bottom cushion of the centerseat.

s3 Push the latch to release the storage bincover.

Left-hand side 3rd row bin (if so equipped)LIC0776 LIC0875



CONSOLE BOX

WARNING

The center console box should not beused while driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

Pull up on the lever s1 to open the console box lids2 .

GLOVE BOXTo open the top portion of the glove box, push thelatch sA up and raise the lid.

To open the lower portion of the glove box, pullthe handle sB down and lower the lid.

Use the master key to lock or unlock the glovebox. The valet key cannot be used to lock orunlock the glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

SUNGLASSES HOLDERTo open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed whiledriving to prevent an accident.

LIC0766 LIC0768 WIC0673



CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

MAP POCKETS SEAT POCKETSA pocket is located on the back of the driver’sseat. A small pocket is also located on the in-board side of the passenger’s seat.

LIC0772 LIC0575



CUP HOLDERS

The front cup holders have adapters that can beremoved to accommodate larger cups.

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

LIC0769Front

LIC0770



To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the frontconsole), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.

2nd row (rear of front console)WIC0771

3rd row — Type ALIC0773

3rd row — Type BLIC0774



CAUTION

● Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

CARGO AREA STORAGE

To access the floor storage area, push down s1to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle s2to lift the luggage board.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargowith ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● Use suitable ropes and hooks to securecargo.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-gage area. It is extremely dangerous toride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

● The child restraint top tether strap maybe damaged by contact with items inthe cargo area. Secure any items in thecargo area. Your child could be seri-ously injured or killed in a collision ifthe top strap is damaged.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

Bottle holderLIC0784 LIC0777



Side finisherWhen hooking on ropes, do not apply a load ofmore than 55 lb (245 N) to a single sA hook or 44lb (196 N) to a single sB hook.

Floor hooksDo not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)to a single hook.

WTI0125 LTI0126



CARGO NETS

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seatbacks.In a sudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

● Be sure to secure all four hooks into theretainers. The cargo restrained in thenet must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) orthe net may not stay secured.

The cargo nets help keep packages in the cargoarea from moving around while the vehicle is inmotion.

To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to theretainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the hooks fromthe cargo net retainers.

WARNING

● The cargo restrained in the luggageside nets must not exceed 8.5 lb (3.9 kg)for each net or the net may not staysecured.

● Do not place sharp objects in the lug-gage side nets. Such objects may be-come dangerous projectiles and causeinjury when the vehicle is moving or ifthe vehicle is involved in a collision.

Large net (if so equipped)LIC0778

Right-hand luggage sidenet (if so equipped)

LIC0793



To install a luggage side net, attach the net to theretainers. To remove, detach the net from theretainers.

The lift gate net is not removable.

WARNING

● The cargo restrained in the lift gate netmust not exceed 2 lb (1 kg) or the netmay not stay secured.

● Do not place sharp objects in the lug-gage side nets. Such objects may be-come dangerous projectiles and causeinjury when the vehicle is moving or ifthe vehicle is involved in a collision.

Left-hand luggage side netLIC0794

Lift gate netLIC0795



ROOF RACK

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roofrack. Do not load more than 220 pounds (100kg). Be careful that your vehicle does not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or itsGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and

rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on theF.M.V.S.S. label (located on the driver’s doorpillar). For more information regarding GVWRand GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion later in this manual.

The front and rear cross bars (if so equipped) canbe adjusted or removed.

To adjust:

1. Loosen the 2 TorxT head fasteners sA onboth ends of the crossbar.

2. Remove the plugs at the desired position(sC ).

3. Slide the crossbar sB to the desired position(sC ) so that the holes in the crossbar line upwith the holes in the sidebar.

4. Tighten the 2 TorxT head fasteners on bothends of the crossbar.

5. Reinstall the plugs at the previous positionsA .

6. Position your luggage on the crossbars andsecure the luggage with rope.

7. Always check the tightness of the TorxThead fasteners.

To remove:

1. Loosen the 2 TorxT head fasteners sA onboth ends of the crossbar.

2. Remove the crossbar from the roof rack.

WIC0914



WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un-secured cargo could cause personalinjury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing itemsfrom the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-ably lift the items onto the roof rack fromthe ground, use a ladder or stool.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position, or for about 45seconds after the ignition switch is turned to theOFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the windows is canceled.

1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger side window switch4. Right rear passenger window switch5. Left rear passenger window switch6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switchThe driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close the front and rearpassenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold itdown. To close a window, pull the switch andhold it up. To stop the opening or closing functionat any time, simply release the switch.

WIC1098

WINDOWS



Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch and hold it down s1 .To close the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Rear power window switchThe rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down s1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

Automatic operationTo fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down to thesecond detent and release it; it need not be held.The window automatically opens all the way. Tostop the window, lift the switch up while thewindow is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held.

WIC1099 LIC0787 LIC0410



Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated whena window is closed by automatic operation, whenthe ignition key is in the ON position or for 45seconds after the ignition key is turned to theOFF position.

If the control unit detects something caught in awindow equipped with automatic operation as itis closing, the window will be immediately low-ered.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

When power window switch does notoperateIf the power window automatic function (closingonly) does not operate properly, perform the fol-lowing procedure to initialize the power windowsystem

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Open the window more than halfway byoperating the power window switch.

3. Pull up and hold the window switch and holdit to close the window, and then hold theswitch for more than 3 seconds after thewindow is closed completely.

4. Release the power window switch. Operatethe window by automatic function to confirmthe initialization is complete.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for otherwindows.

If the power window automatic function does notoperate properly after performing the above pro-cedure, see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof will only operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position. The automatic sun-roof is operational for about 45 seconds, even ifthe ignition switch is turned to the ACC or OFFposition. If the driver’s door or the front passen-ger’s door is opened during this period of about45 seconds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Sliding the sunroofTo fully open the sunroof, push the switch towardDOWN/OPEN s1 .

To fully close the sunroof, push the switch towardUP/CLOSE s2 .

WIC0882

SUNROOF (if so equipped)



To open or close the sunroof part way, push theswitch in any direction while the sunroof is slidingto stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the sunroofClose the sunroof by pushing the switch towardUP/CLOSE s2 . Release the switch, then pushthe UP/CLOSE switch again to tilt the sunroofup.

To tilt the sunroof down, push the switch towardDOWN/OPEN s1 .

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open sunroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe sunroof opening while the vehicle isin motion or while the sunroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the sunroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on the sun-roof or surrounding area.

Auto reverse function (when closing ortilting down the sunroof)

The auto reverse function can be activated whenthe sunroof is closed or tilted down by automaticoperation when the ignition key is in the ONposition or for about 45 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the sunroof oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the sunroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in thesunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof willimmediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in thesunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi-ately tilt up.

If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens; the sunroof will fully close gradu-ally. Make sure nothing is caught in the sunroof.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open sunroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe sunroof opening while the vehicle isin motion or while the sunroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the sunroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on the sun-roof or surrounding area.

SunshadeOpen and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.

If the sunroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair thesunroof.



The interior lights have a three-position switchand operate regardless of ignition switch posi-tion.

When the switch is in the ON position s1 , theinterior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutesunless the ignition key is in the ACC or ONposition.

When the switch is in the O position s2 , theinterior lights will stay on for about 30 secondswhen:

● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a keyor the power door lock switch while all doorsare closed and the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer isactivated when:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, akey, or the power door lock switch.

● The ignition switch is turned ON.

The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-utes while doors are open to prevent the batteryfrom becoming discharged.

When the switch is in the OFF position s3 , theinterior lights do not illuminate, regardless of doorposition.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

Type ALIC0789

Type BLIC0792

INTERIOR LIGHTS



To turn the personal lights on, press the switches.To turn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION


To turn the map lights on, press the switches. Toturn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION


The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-position switch. To operate, push the switch tothe desired position.

ON: The light is illuminated.

Normal (center) position: The light illuminateswhen any door is opened or unlocked by thekeyfob. The light turns off after 30 seconds whenall doors are closed.

OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless ofdoor position or lock status.

LIC0790 LIC0791 LIC0590

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped) MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT



The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver provides aconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters intoone built-in device.

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks and se-curity systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLinkT will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. Foradditional information refer to “Program-ming HomeLinkT” later in this section.

WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot detectan object in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT

1. To begin, press and hold the two outerHomeLinkT buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light s1 blinks (after 20seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface.

WIC0986

HOMELINKT UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)



3. Using both hands, simultaneously press andhold both the HomeLinkT button you want toprogram and the hand-held transmitter but-ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 hasbeen completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLinkT flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidly flash-ing light indicates successful programming.To activate the garage door or other pro-grammed device, press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLinkT button — releasingwhen the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkT blinksrapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,HomeLinkT has picked up a “rolling code”garage door opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to train theHomeLinkT to complete the programmingwhich may require a ladder and another per-son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-gram button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lens toaccess the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, youhave 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.Use the help of a second person for conve-nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-ing the garage door opener program button,quickly and firmly press and release theHomeLinkT button you’ve just programmed.Press and release the HomeLinkT button upto 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLinkT button should now be pro-grammed. (To program the remainingHomeLinkT buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLinkT buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficultyprogramming your HomeLinkT buttons, refer tothe HomeLinkT web site at: www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

WIC0987



PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toHomeLinkT, continue to press and hold theHomeLinkT button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLinkT”) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-sible damage to the garage door openercomponents.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKTUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-propriate programmed HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver button. The red indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLinkT surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLinkT andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLinkT is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition – keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment. The phone numbers are located inthe Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATIONIndividual buttons cannot be cleared. However,to clear all programming, press and hold the twooutside buttons and release when the indicatorlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINKT BUTTONTo reprogram a HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverbutton, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT but-ton. Do not release the button until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76mm) away from the HomeLinkT surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight begins to flash rapidly, release bothbuttons.



The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver button hasnow been reprogrammed. The new device canbe activated by pushing the HomeLinkT buttonthat was just programmed. This procedure willnot affect any other programmed HomeLinkTbuttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENIf your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult theOwner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalinformation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLinkT Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) This de-vice must accept any interference that maybe received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D. CV2V67690



3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Glass hatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Opening the fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19


1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-der chip and chrome NISSAN brandsymbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip3. Key number plate4. Transponder chipA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the masteror valet keys which are registered to the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System components in yourvehicle. These keys have a transponder chip inthe key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the glove boxlock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key withsomeone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as five NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedwith one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have toyour NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-

cause the registration process will erase thememory of all key codes previously registeredinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.After the registration process, these componentswill only recognize keys coded into the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System during registration.Any key that is not given to your dealer at the timeof registration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

WPD0128

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


LOCKING WITH KEYThe power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front s1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral s3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors s4 .

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position s1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position s2 .

Driver’s sideLPD0240

Inside lockLPD0298

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3


LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side), tothe lock position s1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position s2 .

Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition and any dooropen, all doors will lock and then unlock auto-matically. This helps to prevent the keys frombeing accidently locked inside the vehicle.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCKChild safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside.

Door lock switchWPD0381 LPD0299



It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on theinterior lights, and activate the panic alarm byusing the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigationsystem, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”later in this section. For vehicles with navigationsystem, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” inthe “Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems” section later in this manual.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance ofapproximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. Theeffective distance depends upon the conditionsaround the vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged.

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of that key-fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-authorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Push the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard warning lightsflash twice and the horn beeps once toindicate all doors are locked.

LPD0209

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM



● When the button is pushed with alldoors locked, the hazard warning lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

● If a door is open and you push thebutton, the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard warning lights willnot flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For vehicleswithout navigation system, refer to “Silencing thehorn beep feature” later in this section. For ve-hicles with navigation system, refer to “Vehicleelectronic systems” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-tion later in this manual. Unlocking doors

Push the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed with the ignitionkey in any position except the ON position.

● The interior lights turn on and the light timeractivates for 30 seconds when the interiorlight switch is in the DOOR position with theignition key in any position except the ONposition.

Push the button on the keyfob again within5 seconds.

● All doors unlock.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into theignition and turning to the ON or START position,locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing theinterior light switch to the off position.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pushed,all doors will lock automatically within 1 minuteunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe key is turned from OFF to ON.

Opening windows (if so equipped)

The keyfob allows you to open the front windowssimultaneously.

● To open the front windows, press thebutton on the keyfob for longer than 3seconds after all doors are unlocked.

LPD0210



The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the keyfob.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drivepositioner memoryIf the vehicle is equipped with automatic drivepositioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memorysetting.

See “Automatic drive positioner” later in this sec-tion.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 25 seconds, or

● any button is pushed on the keyfob.

Silencing the horn beep featureIf desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and lamp flashfeature with the keyfob, the display screen(if so equipped) will not show the currentmode and cannot be used to change themode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-vious mode and re-enable the displayscreen control.

LPD0211 LPD0262



To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

Using the interior lightsPush the button on the keyfob once to turnon the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”in the “Instruments and controls”section earlier inthis manual.

s1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver’s side instrument panel. Thehood will spring up slightly.

s2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to theside as illustrated with your fingertips andraise the hood.

s3 Insert the support rod into the slot on theunderside of the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and makesure it locks into place.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

LPD0302

HOOD



WARNING

● Always be sure the lift gate has beenclosed securely to prevent it from open-ing while driving.

● Do not drive with the lift gate open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-fore closing the lift gate.

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors including the lift gate simulta-neously.

To open the lift gate, pull up on the handle.

To close, lower and push the lift gate down se-curely.

LIFT GATE RELEASEIf the lift gate cannot be locked or unlocked withthe door lock switch or the keyfob due to adischarged battery, follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the liftgate.

2. Move the lever up to lock or down to unlock.

LPD0300 LPD0251

LIFT GATE



To open, pull up on the smaller outside handle torelease the glass hatch, then pull up on the glasshatch. To close, lower and push the glass hatchdown securely.

NOTE:

The lift gate must be unlocked in order toopen the glass hatch.

WARNING

Do not drive with the glass hatch open.This could allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaustgas” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER LIDThe fuel-filler lid automatically unlocks when alldoors are unlocked.

1. Unlock the fuel-filler lid using one of thefollowing operations.

● Unlock all doors with the keyfob.

● Unlock all doors with the key.

● Press the power door lock switch to theunlock position.

2. Push the lid to open.

To lock, close the fuel-filler lid and lock the doors.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn thecap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turnthe cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks areheard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder s1 whilerefueling.

LPD0301 LPD0303 LPD0253

GLASS HATCH FUEL-FILLER DOOR



WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury. Then remove the cap.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator light to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

● Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the mal-

function indicator light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionearlier in this manual.



TILT OPERATIONPull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust thesteering wheel up or down to the desired posi-tion.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheelin place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-justed for driving comfort.

Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust thebrake and accelerator pedal position forward s1or backward s2 . Pedal adjustment can only beperformed when:

● Ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC posi-tion

● Ignition switch is ON and the selector leveris in the P (Park) position

The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-justed separately.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the pedal position with yourfoot on the pedal.

LPD0304 LPD0305

STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if soequipped)



s1 To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor.

s2 To block glare from the side, remove themain sun visor from the center mount andswing the visor to the side.

s3 Slide the extension sun visor in or out asneeded.

CAUTION

● Do not store the sun visor before return-ing the extension to its originalposition.

● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-edly downward.

VANITY MIRRORSTo access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanitymirrors are illuminated and turn on when themirror cover is open.

WPD0315

WPD0307

SUN VISORS



REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The night position s1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position s2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally dims according to the intensity of the head-lights of the vehicle following you. The automaticanti-glare feature operates only when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

The indicator light s1 will illuminate when theautomatic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensorss2 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of thesensors, resulting in improper operation.

Type A

To turn off the anti-glare feature, push and holdthe button for about 8 seconds. The indi-cator light will turn off.

To turn on the anti-glare feature again, push andhold the button for about 8 seconds. Theindicator light will turn on.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, pressthe button as described in the chart belowto activate various features of the automatic anti-glare review mirror.

WPD0126

Type AWPD0331

MIRRORS





1 secondCompass/outside temperature dis-play toggles on/off (if so equipped)

5 secondsOutside temperature display togglesbetween °C and °F (if so equipped)

8 secondsAutomatic anti-glare/indicator lighttoggles on/off

11 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings (ifso equipped)

13 secondsCompass enters calibration mode (ifso equipped)

For more information about the compass andoutside mirror features (if so equipped), refer to“Compass and outside temperature display” inthe “Instruments and controls” section.

Type BTo turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, pressthe button. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, pressthe button again. The indicator light willturn on.

For information on HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver operation, see “HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

For information on the compass and outside tem-perature display, see “Compass and outsidetemperature display” in the “Instrument and con-trols” section of this manual.

Type BWPD0333



OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Move the small switch s1 to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired positionusing the large switch s2 .

WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.You could lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-tional information, see “Rear window and outsidemirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the“Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

Foldable outside mirrorsPull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

LPD0237 LPD0259



The automatic drive positioner system has twofeatures:

● Memory storage function

● Entry/exit function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, acceleratorand brake pedals, and outside mirrors can bestored in the automatic drive positioner memory.Follow these procedures to use the memory sys-tem.

1. Set the automatic transmission selector le-ver to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator andbrake pedals, and outside mirrors to thedesired positions by manually operatingeach adjusting switch. For additional infor-mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section and “Pedal position adjust-ment” and “Outside mirrors” earlier in thissection.

During this step, do not turn the ignition toany position other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for atleast 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.After the indicator light goes off, the se-lected positions are stored in the selectedmemory (1 or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the same memoryswitch, the previous memory will be deleted.

LPD0306

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (ifso equipped)



Linking a keyfob to a stored memoryposition

Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memoryposition (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-ing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-tion.

2. While the indicator light for the memoryswitch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-onds, press the button on the keyfob.The indicator light will blink. After the indica-tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to thatmemory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch,press the button on the keyfob. The driv-er’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and out-side mirrors will move to the memorized position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is saved to thememory switch, the keyfob automaticallyre-links.

Confirming memory storage● Turn the ignition ON and push the SET

switch. If the main memory has not beenstored, the indicator light will come on forapproximately 0.5 seconds. When the

memory has stored the position, the indica-tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec-onds.

● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse opens, the memory storage function willbe canceled and must be restarted before astored memory position can be set again.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the memory storage function. Youcan also restart the memory storage functionusing the following procedure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more thantwo times with the ignition key in the LOCKposition.

Once the memory storage function has beenrestarted, you can store a memory position.See “Memory storage function” earlier in thissection.

Selecting the memorized position

Set the automatic transmission selector lever tothe P (Park) position, then:

● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’sdoor, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fullyfor at least 1 second, or

● Turn the ignition switch to the ON positionand push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully forat least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals,and outside mirrors will move to the memorizedposition with the indicator light blinking, and thenthe light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTIONThis system is designed so that the driver’s seatwill automatically move when the automatictransmission selector lever is in the P (Park)position. This allows the driver to get into and outof the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

● When the key is removed from the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is opened.

● When the driver’s door is opened with theignition key turned to LOCK.

● When the ignition key is turned from ACC toLOCK with the driver’s door open.

The driver’s seat will return to the previous posi-tion:

● When the key is inserted into the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is closed.

● When the driver’s door is closed with the keyturned to LOCK.



● When the key is turned from ACC to ONwhile the automatic transmission selectorlever is in the P (Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-celed. For vehicles with navigation system, see“Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Displayscreen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys-tems” section of this manual. For vehicles withoutnavigation system, see your NISSAN dealer.

Restarting the entry/exit functionIf the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuseopens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the entry/exit function. You can also restartthe entry/exit function using the following proce-dure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more thantwo times with the ignition key in the LOCKposition.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SYSTEM OPERATIONThe automatic drive positioner system will notwork or will stop operating under the followingconditions:

● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h).

● When any of the memory switches arepushed while the automatic drive positioneris operating.

● When the adjusting switch for the driver’sseat is turned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

● When the memory switch (1 or 2) is notpushed and held for at least 1 second.

● When the seat has been already moved tothe memorized position.

● When no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

● When the automatic transmission selectorlever is moved from P (Park) to any otherposition.

● When the driver’s door remains open morethan 45 seconds and the ignition switch isnot in the ON position.

The automatic drive positioner system can beadjusted and canceled. For vehicles with naviga-tion system, see “Vehicle electronic systems” inthe “Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems” section of this manual. For ve-hicles without navigation system, see yourNISSAN dealer.




MEMO

4 Display screen, heater, air conditionerand audio systems

Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2How to use the joystick and ENTER button . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 4-17Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . 4-22Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23Rear control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26

FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-26Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36FM/AM/SAT radio with compact discchanger (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48

NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49

Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-50Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51Playing a digital video disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58


WARNING

● Positioning of the heating or air condi-tioning controls and display controlsshould not be done while driving in or-der that full attention may be given tothe driving operation.

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

1. brightness control button (P. 4-13)

2. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-3)

3. Joystick and ENTER button (P. 4-3)

4. SETTING button (P. 4-7)

5. TRIP button (P. 4-3)

6. zoom out button*

7. zoom in button*

8. DEST button*

WHA0731

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if soequipped)

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems


9. ROUTE button*

10. MAP button*

11. GUIDE VOICE button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the controlpanel.

“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.By selecting this key you can proceed to the nextfunction.

HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK ANDENTER BUTTONUse the joystick to choose an item on the displayscreen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right tohighlight an item. Then press the ENTER buttonto select the item or perform the action.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTONThis button has two functions.

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button during setup, thesetup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

In some screens pressing the BACK button ac-cepts the changes made during setup.

SETTING UP THE START-UPSCREENWhen you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, thesystem start-up warning is displayed on thescreen. Read the warning and select the “OK”key by pressing the ENTER button.

If you do not press the ENTER button, the Navi-gation system will not proceed to the next step inthe Navigation display.

If you do not touch a button or screen key formore than 1 minute on the system start-up warn-ing screen, the screen will change to the audioscreen automatically.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON

When the TRIP button is pressed, the followingmodes will display on the screen.

Warning message (if any) → TRIP 1 → TRIP 2 →FUEL ECONOMY → MAINTENANCE → Audioor OFF → TRIP 1

Each trip display tracks an independent trip anddisplays the following:

● Elapsed Time - Journey time since the lastreset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59minutes.

● Driving Distance - Distance driven (mile orkm) since the last reset.

LHA0572

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3


● Average Speed - Average speed driven(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

Resetting trip 1 and trip 2Each trip screen can be reset to 0. Press the TRIPbutton to select the TRIP screen to be reset.

● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-mately 1.5 seconds.

Fuel economy

Press the TRIP button to display Average FuelEconomy and Distance To Empty.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated basedon fuel consumption since the last reset. Thedisplay is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting thebattery cables, the display will show (**.*).

Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can bereset to 0. Press the TRIP button repeatedly untilthe FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown, then ei-ther:

● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-mately 1.5 seconds.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while the ignitionswitch is OFF is small, the display just beforethe ignition switch is turned OFF may con-tinue to be displayed.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves, thefuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarilychange the display.

LHA0573



Maintenance itemsPress the TRIP button to display maintenanceinformation or set maintenance intervals for thefollowing:

● Engine Oil

● Tire Rotation

● Tire Pressure (if so equipped)

For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to “Tirepressure information” later in this section.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” keyusing the joystick and press the ENTER button todisplay the screen to change the maintenanceinterval.

Select the “Maintenance Schedule”key using thejoystick and move the joystick to right or left to setthe maintenance interval.

Resetting the maintenance interval

The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte-nance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilome-ters).

Select the “Reset” key using the joystick andpress the ENTER button.

LHA0574 LHA0575 LHA0576



Displaying the maintenance notice re-minder

Select the “Display Maintenance Notification”key and press the ENTER button to display theMAINTENANCE INFORMATION automaticallyat the set maintenance interval.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINEOIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automaticallydisplayed as shown when both of the followingconditions are met:

● The vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition key is turned OFF.

● The ignition key is turned ON the next timethe vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, pressthe BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displayseach time the key is turned ON until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

● “Reset” key is selected.

● “Display Maintenance Notification” is set toOFF.

● The maintenance interval is set again.

Tire pressure information

To display tire pressure information, press theTRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCEscreen is displayed. Select the “Tire Pressure”key using the joystick and press the ENTER but-ton.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.

LHA0483 LHA0577



Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s operation and theoutside temperature.

In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


HOW TO USE THE SETTINGBUTTONWhen the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-TINGS screen will appear on the display. You canselect and/or adjust several functions, featuresand modes that are available for your vehicle.Move the joystick and press the ENTER button toselect each item to be set.

Display settingsSelect the “Display” key and press the ENTERbutton. The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap-pear.

LHA0558 WHA0715



Brightness/contrast:

Select the “Brightness/Contrast” key to adjustthe brightness and contrast of the map back-ground. Use the joystick to adjust the brightnessto darker or brighter and the contrast to lower orhigher.

The new settings are automatically saved whenyou exit the setting screen by pressing the BACKbutton or any other mode button.

Display off:

Select the “Display Off” key. The indicator of the“Display Off” turns amber and the messageabove will be displayed briefly. When the audio,HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any modebutton on the control panel is operated, the dis-play turns on for that operation. If one of thecontrol panel buttons is pressed, the display willnot automatically turn off until that operation isfinished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-matically after 5 seconds.

To turn the screen on,

● Press the SETTING button and select the“Display” key and then select the “DisplayOff” key. Then set the screen to on by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Hold the button for approximately 2seconds and the message “resuming dis-play” will appear and the “Display Off” keywill be automatically turned on (no amberindicator).

WHA0716 LHA0642



Lower display setting:

You can choose to display the audio or HVAC(Heater and air conditioner) functions on thelower part of the display. Select the “Lower Dis-play Setting” key by using the joystick. Then se-lect the “Audio” or “HVAC” key using the joystickor by pressing the ENTER button.


Any time audio information is shown on the mainpart of the screen, HVAC information will bedisplayed on the lower part of the screen. HVACinformation will be shown even if “Audio” is se-lected to be displayed on the lower part of thescreen.

Vehicle electronic systemsSelect the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key byusing the joystick and pressing the ENTER but-ton. The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMSscreen will be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions byselecting the desired item using the joystick, thenpressing the ENTER button. The indicator light, boxat the left of the selected item, alternately turns onand off each time the ENTER button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

WHA0715 WHA0717 LHA0559



Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle: Se-lect so the driver’s seat automatically moves backand returns to the original position for ease of exitand entry.

Remote unlock driver’s door first: Select tochange which doors will unlock first during anunlocking operation:

Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors

Keyless remote response — horn: Select toturn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used whenthe LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the displayscreen will not show the current mode. Usethe keyfob to return to the previous modeand re-enable the display screen control.

Keyless remote response — lights: Select toturn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash modeused when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on thekeyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length oftime before doors automatically re-lock.

Sensitivity of automatic headlights: Selectto change the sensitivity setting of the automaticheadlights:

● Lower: less sensitive, automatic headlightswill take longer to come on when the head-light sensor senses less ambient light.

LHA0564 LHA0565



● Higher: more sensitive, automatic headlightswill come on quicker when the headlightsensor senses less ambient light.

Automatic headlights off delay: Select tochange the setting for the length of time theautomatic headlights remain on after exiting thevehicle.

Speed dependent wiper: Select to turn on orturn off the driving speed dependent intermittentwiper function.

Return all settings to default: Select tochange all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMSto their default settings.

System settings

Select the “System Settings” key by using thejoystick and pressing the ENTER button. TheSYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed.

Language/unit

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear whenselecting the “Language/Unit” key and pressingthe ENTER button.

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGMetric — km, °C, L/100 km

You can select the language and unit using thejoystick or pressing the ENTER button.

The settings are automatically saved when youexit the menu by pressing the BACK button orany other mode button.

LHA0561



Clock

Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours”or “Minutes” key and move thejoystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.


Setting daylight savings time:

Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust theclock to daylight savings time.

ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour.

OFF: The current time is displayed.

Adjusting the time to the GPS:

Select the “Auto Adjust” key.

The time will be reset to the GPS time.

LHA0562 LHA0566 LHA0567



Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.

The TIME ZONE screen will appear.

2. Select one of the following zones, depend-ing on the current location.

● Pacific zone

● Mountain zone

● Central zone

● Eastern zone

● Atlantic zone

● Newfoundland zone

After selection, the CLOCK SETTINGS screenwill appear.

The GPS time (manual time) corresponding tothe selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zonehas been set as the initial (default) setting.

Beep setting

With this option ON, a beep will sound if anyaudio button is pressed.

Navigation settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

Guidance voice settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

BUTTONTo change the display brightness, pressthe button. Pressing the button again willchange the display to “DAY” or “NIGHT” display.Then, adjust the brightness by moving the joy-stick right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if theBACK button is pressed, the display will return tothe previous display.

LHA0568 LHA0563



Adjust air flow direction for the driver and pas-senger side windowss1 , driver and passengerfront s2 centers3 , rear passenger compartments4 and rear center console (if so equipped) ven-tilatorss5 by moving the ventilator slide and/orventilator assemblies.

LHA0488rear center console ventilators

(if so equipped)

WHA0510

VENTILATORS



WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

1. Fan control dial2. Temperature control dial3. Air flow control dial4. Air conditioner button (if so equipped)5. Rear window defroster button (if so

equipped)6. Air recirculation button (if so equipped)

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select theair flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling (airconditioning if so equipped).

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets

and foot outlets.

LHA0489

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual)



— Air flows mainly from defrosteroutlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on):Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Push the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

OFF position (Indicator light off):Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button (if soequipped)

The button is provided only on vehicles equippedwith an air conditioner.

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired (1 - 4) position and push thebutton to turn on the air conditioner. The indicatorlight comes on when the air conditioner is oper-ating. To turn off the air conditioner, pushthe button again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch (if soequipped)For more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window defrosterswitch” in the “Instruments and controls” sectionof this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

HeatingThis mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Push the button to the off position fornormal heating.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to theposition.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side andcenter ventilators.

1. Push the button to the off position.



4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defoggingThis mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.






● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and thetemperature control lever to the full HOTposition.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light will not illuminate) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the fan control dial isturned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, evenif the air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.

Bi-level heatingThis mode directs cooler air from the side andcenter vents and warmer air from the floor outlets.When the temperature control dial is moved tothe full hot or full cool position, the air betweenthe vents and the floor outlets is the same tem-perature.

1. Push the button (if so equipped) tothe off position.




Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light will not illuminate) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the fan control dial isturned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, evenif the air flow control dial is turned to a

position other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode (if soequipped) automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (ifso equipped)

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired (1 - 4) position, and push in thebutton to activate the air conditioner. When theair conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifyingfunctions are added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.






4. Push the button. The indicator lightcomes on.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe on position (indicator light on). Be sureto return the button to the off positionfor normal cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.






Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows anddehumidify the air.




When the , or positions in betweenare selected, the air conditioner automaticallyturns on (however, the indicator light will notilluminate) if the outside temperature is more than36°F (2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the fan control dial is turnedto OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if the air flowcontrol dial is turned to a position other thanthe position. This dehumidifies the airwhich helps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowing outside airto be drawn into the passenger compartment tofurther improve the defogging performance.


Operating tips● Keep the windows and sunroof (if so

equipped) closed while the air conditioner isin operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.



AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. For additional informationon heating and cooling see “Heater and air con-ditioner” in this section”. The air recirculation( ) button should always be in the OFFposition for heating and defrosting.

WHA0780



WHA0781 WHA0782



WHA0783 WHA0784



1. Driver temperature control dial2. Front window defroster button3. Fan speed control and system OFF dial4. AUTO button5. Passenger temperature control dial6. A/C ON/OFF button7. Rear control and fan speed dial8. Rear window defroster button9. MODE button10. Air recirculation button11. Rear temperature control dial

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)This mode may be normally used all year round asthe system automatically works to keep a con-stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will bedisplayed.)

2. Turn the driver’s side temperature controldial to the left or right to set the desiredtemperature. Driver and passenger tem-peratures can be set independently. PressAUTO a second time to activate dual climatecontrol functions. Turn the passenger’s sidetemperature control dial to the left or right toset the desired passenger’s temperature.

● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

LHA0491

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)



● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/offare also controlled automatically.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the defroster control button toturn the system on. The display will show thedefrost icon.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of thewindows, turn the manual fan control dial tothe maximum position .

● As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, push the AUTO button to return to theauto mode.

● When the DEF control is activated,the air conditioner will automatically beturned on at outside temperatures above36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for more thanone minute, the air conditioning system willcontinue to operate until the fan control isturned OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if

the air flow MODE control button is used toselect a position other than the posi-tion. This dehumidifies the air which helpsdefog the windshield. The air recirculationmode automatically turns off, allowing out-side air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control dial

Turn the fan speed control dial left or rightto manually control the fan speed or turn thesystem on or off.

Push the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

The mode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passenger com-partment to prevent fogging.

Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push theAUTO button to return to automatic mode.

The air recirculation button will not be activatedwhen the air conditioner is in DEF, floor, orfloor/defrost mode.

Air flow controlPushing the MODE button manually controls airflow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system offTurn and hold the fan speed control dial all theway to the left ( 0 ) until the system turns off.



1. Rear fan speed control dial.

2. Rear temperature control dial.

REAR CONTROL DIALYou can adjust the climate control system for rearseat passengers using the dials on the maincontrol panel. Front passengers can control therear functions by placing the controls on anysetting other than the “R”.

OPERATING TIPS● When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, air flow from the foot outletswill operate normally.

The sunload sensor s1 , located on the top centerof the instrument panel, helps the system main-tain a constant temperature. Do not put anythingon or around this sensor.

WHA0509 LIC0835



To operate the rear air conditioner, the enginemust be running.

The rear seat air conditioner can be turned onand off from the front controls. If the rear seat fancontrol dial is set to (0), the air conditioner isturned off. If it is set to any of the fan speedpositions, air is discharged from the rear vents atthe corresponding speed. When the rear seat fancontrol dial is set to (R), the rear seat passengerscontrol their own fan speed.

1. Rear fan speed control dial.2. Rear temperature control dial.CONTROLS

Fan control dialThe fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on andoff, and controls fan speed.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows rear passen-gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” section of thismanual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

LHA0490

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER



RADIO

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knobto turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio withthe engine not running, the key should be turnedto the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area, and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30miles (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single chan-nel) FM having slightly more range than stereoFM. External influences may sometimes interferewith FM station reception even if the FM station iswithin 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distance betweenthe transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow aline-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the samecharacteristics as light. For example, they willreflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter) static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed or thebattery has been replaced, the satellite radio maynot work properly. This is not a malfunction. Waitmore than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and

AUDIO SYSTEM



the vehicle outside of any metal or large buildingfor satellite radio to receive all of the necessarydata.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isselected unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio can only be installed in vehicles thatwere factory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satelliteradio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

LHA0099



● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Compact Disc with MP3 or WMATerms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD-ROM can reduce thefile size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3compression removes the redundant andirrelevant parts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is acompressed audio format created by Mi-crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMAcodec offers greater file compression thanthe MP3 codec, enabling storage of moredigital audio tracks in the same amount ofspace when compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of themethods for writing data to media. Writingdata once to the media is called a singlesession, and writing more than once is calleda multisession.



● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digital musicfile such as song title, artist, encoding bitrate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-mation is displayed on the Artist/song titleline on the display.

* WindowsT and Windows MediaT are regis-tered trademarks and trademarks in the UnitedStates of America and other countries of Mi-crosoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMAfiles is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3 orWMA files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.

Playback order chartWHA0773



Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supportedversions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*201: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.



Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder namesand file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, therewill be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.



1. PRESET A·B·C button2. Display screen3. CD button4. CD eject button5. CD insert slot6. MENU button

7. AUDIO button8. Station select (1 - 6) buttons9. SEEK/TRACK (FF/REV) button10. PWR/VOL control knob11. BAND button

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see 9Audio opera-tion precautions9 earlier in this section.

Audio main operation

PWR/VOL control knob

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,then press the PWR/VOL control knob. If youlisten to the radio with the engine not running,turn the key to the ACC position. The mode (radioor CD) that was playing immediately before thesystem was turned off resumes playing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.Pressing the PWR/VOL control knob again turnsthe system off.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right toincrease volume or to the left to decrease volume.

AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade, Bal-ance):

Press the AUDIO button to change the mode asfollows:

BASS → TREB → FAD → BAL → Audio or OFF→ BASS

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, pressthe AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-

WHA0586



pears in the display. Press the SEEK/TRACKbutton to adjust Bass and Treble to the desiredlevel. You can also use the SEEK/TRACK buttonto adjust Fader and Balance modes. Fader ad-justs the sound level between the front and rearspeakers and Balance adjusts the sound be-tween the right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 7 seconds.

Clock set

1. Press and hold the MENU button until itbeeps (for more than 2 seconds) to enter theclock set mode.

2. The hours will start flashing. Press theSEEK/TRACK button or to ad-just the hours.

3. Press the MENU button until the radio beepsto switch to the minute adjustment.

4. The minutes will start flashing. Press theSEEK/TRACK button or to ad-just the minutes.

5. Press the MENU button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 7 seconds, or press the MENU button againto return to the regular clock display.

FM/AM radio operation

FM/AM band select:

Pressing the BAND button will change the bandas follows:

AM ←→ FM

When the BAND button is pressed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

If a compact disc is playing when the BANDbutton is pressed, the compact disc will auto-matically be turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.

MENU button:

Press the MENU button while the radio is playingto change the tuning mode as follows:

SEEK tuning mode → TUNE mode → SCANtuning mode

TUNE and SCAN are shown in the display win-dow for each mode. No icon is displayed forSEEK tuning.

SEEK tuning

While in SEEK tuning mode, press theSEEK/TRACK button or for lessthan 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from lowto high frequencies or high to low frequencies,depending on which button is pressed, and stopsat the next broadcasting station. Press thebutton, once the highest broadcasting station isreached, the radio continues in the SEEK modeat the lowest broadcasting station. Pressthe button, once the lowest broadcastingstation is reached, the radio continues in theSEEK mode at the highest broadcasting station.

Manual tuning

While in TUNE mode, press the SEEK/TRACKbutton or for manual tuning. Pressand hold the SEEK/TRACK buttonor to move quickly through the channels.

SCAN tuning

While in SCAN tuning mode, press and hold theSEEK/TRACK button or for morethan 1.5 seconds.



Scan tuning begins from low to high frequenciesor high to low frequencies, depending on whichSEEK/TRACK button or is pressed.scan tuning stops at each broadcasting stationfor 5 seconds. When scanning, SCAN illumi-nates in the display and the radio station blinks.When temporarily stopped on a station, SCANblinks and the radio station display is solid.Pressing the SEEK/TRACK buttonor again during this 5 second period stopsscan tuning and the radio remains tuned to thatradio station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio tothe A, B and C preset button in any combinationof AM or FM stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to changebetween storage banks. The radio displaysthe icon A, B or C to indicate which set ofpresets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manualTUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any ofthe desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)until a beep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,and carefully insert the compact disc into the slotwith the label side up. The compact disc is auto-matically pulled into the slot and starts to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the compact disc starts to play.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When the SEEK/TRACK button ispressed while the compact disc is playing, thenext track following the present one starts to playfrom the beginning. Press SEEK/TRACKbutton several times to skip several tracks.Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-

pears in the display window. (When the last trackon the compact disc is skipped, the first track isplayed.)

When SEEK/TRACK button is pressed,the track being played returns to the beginning.Press SEEK/TRACK button several timesto skip back several tracks. Each time the buttonis pressed the CD moves back 1 track.

SEEK/TRACK (FF/REV)button:

Press and hold the SEEK/TRACK buttonor while a compact disc is playing, thecompact disc plays at an increased speed whilefast forwarding or rewinding. When the button isreleased, the compact disc returns to normal playspeed.

MENU button:

When the MENU button is pressed while thecompact disc is playing, the play pattern changesas follows:

RPT ←→ MIX ←→ Normal

RPT: The track that is currently playing will berepeated.

MIX: The order of the tracks on the disc will bemixed during play, not following the sequence onthe compact disc. The same track may be re-



peated twice. Press the button while in theMIX mode and tracks will be chosen at random.

When a new compact disc is inserted, the playpattern automatically changes to normal.

CD EJECT:

When the button is pressed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When the button is pressed while thecompact disc is playing, the compact disc willeject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

This indicator appears on the display whena CD is loaded with the audio system on.

1. PRESET A·B·C button2. Display screen3. DISP/CLOCK button4. SEEK/TRACK button

5. CD or CD/REAR AV (if so equipped)button

6. RADIO button*7. AUX button8. SCAN RPT button

Type AWHA0734



9. CAT FOLDER button10. LOAD button11. CD insert slot12. CD eject button13. PWR/VOL control knob14. Station and CD select (1 – 6) buttons15. AUDIO/TUNE button

*No satellite radio reception is availablewhen the RADIO button is pressed toaccess satellite radio stations unlessoptional satellite receiver and antennaare installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription isactive. Satellite radio can only be in-stalled in vehicles that were factory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (ifso equipped)

Audio main operationPOWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpress the PWR/VOL control knob while the sys-

tem is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) whichwas playing immediately before the system wasturned off.

To turn the system off, press the PWR/VOL con-trol knob.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE,FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode asfollows:

BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE→ SSV (if so equipped)

To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade andBalance, press the AUDIO knob until the desiredmode appears in the display. Turn the Tuningknob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desiredlevel. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjustFader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts thesound level between the front and rear speakersand Balance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID orHIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

Clock set

1. Press the DISP/CLOCK button until itbeeps (>1.5 seconds).

2. The hours will start flashing. Press the CATFOLDER or button or SEEKTRACK or button to adjust thehours.

3. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again toswitch to the minute adjustment.

4. Press the CAT FOLDER orbutton or SEEK TRACK orbutton to adjust the minutes.

5. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to exitthe clock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 7 seconds, or you may press theDISP/CLOCK button again to return to the regu-lar clock display.

DISP (display) button:

This DISP (display) button will show text aboutMP3, SAT or CD information in the audio display.



CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:Disc title ←→ Track title.

To change the default display mode, press theAUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODEappears on the display, then rotate the knob toselect the following display modes: Disc number←→ Folder number.

Once the display mode is selected, press theAUDIO knob again to store the setting. If theAUDIO knob is not pressed within 8 seconds, thedisplay will refresh with the last selected displaymode setting.

● Track title mode displays the title of the se-lected CD track.

● Disc title mode displays the title of the CDbeing played.

● Track number mode displays the numberselected disc and the track that is currentlybeing played on the disk.

● Disc number mode displays the current discnumber playing in the changer.

MP3 display mode

To change the text displayed when listening to anMP3/WMA CD with MP3/WMA text (when CDwith text is being used), press the DISP button.The DISP button will scroll through the CD text asfollows: Track title ←→ Folder title ←→ Artisttitle ←→ Disc number ←→ Folder number.


Once a display mode is selected, press the AU-DIO knob again to store the setting.

● Folder number mode displays the selectedfolder number and the track number that iscurrently being played.

● Disc number mode displays the selecteddisc number and the track number that iscurrently being played.

● Artist title mode displays the artist title of theMP3/WMA file.

● Track title mode displays the track title of theMP3/WMA file.

● Folder title mode displays the folder namegiven to the MP3 folder.

Display satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISPbutton. The DISP button will scroll through thebroadcast information as follows: Name ←→Title ←→ Current display mode.

To change the default display mode press theAUDIO button to display mode and press theTUNE button to select the following displaymodes: Channel number ←→ Channel name←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode isselected press the AUDIO button again to storethe setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressedafter 8 seconds the display will refresh with thelast selected display mode setting.

● Channel number mode displays the channelnumber of the selected satellite radio sta-tion.

● Channel name mode displays the channelname of the selected satellite radio station.

● Name mode displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Title mode displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.



FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pushing the RADIO button will change the bandas follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO button is pushed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe POWER/VOLUME control knob is de-pressed to ON.

No satellite radio reception is available when theRADIO button is pressed to access satellite radiostations unless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™ sat-ellite radio service subscription is active. Satelliteradio can only be installed in vehicles that werefactory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radiois not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. Ifsatellite radio is not operational then the RADIObutton is used to toggle between AM and FMbands.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIObutton is pushed, the compact disc will automati-cally be turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

CAT FOLDER (tuning)button:

To manually tune the radio, press the CATFOLDER button or or turn the tun-ing knob to right or left.

To move quickly through the channels, press andhold either the or button down formore than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK/TRACK tuningbutton:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orfor less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to lowor low to high frequencies and stop at the nextbroadcasting station.

To seek quickly through the channels, press andhold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5seconds. When the button is released the radiowill seek to the next broadcasting station.

SCAN RPT tuning (Type A, B and D only):

Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5seconds to stop at each broadcasting station(AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds.Pressing the button again during this 5 second

period will stop scan tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPTbutton is not pressed within 5 seconds, scantuning moves to the next station.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.






Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc will beguided automatically into the slot and start play-ing. To insert the disc, first press the LOADbutton.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing the PWR/VOLcontrol knob will start the compact disc.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discsin the CD changer.

LOAD button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the loadbutton for less than 1.5 seconds. Selectthe loading slot by pressing the CD insert selectbutton (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press theload button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radiowill automatically be turned off and the compactdisc will start to play.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When the button is pressed for less than1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, thetrack being played returns to its beginning. Pressseveral times to skip back through tracks. Thecompact disc will go back the number of timesthe button is pressed.

When the button is pressed for less than1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing,the next track will start to play from its beginning.Press several times to skip through tracks. Thecompact disc will advance the number of timesthe button is pressed. (When the last track on thecompact disc is skipped through, the first trackwill be played.)

CAT FOLDER button:

While playing a CD, press the CAT FOLDERbutton or to fast forward or rewind atrack on a CD.



MP3 CAT FOLDERbutton:

While playing an MP3 CD, press the CATFOLDER button or to scan back-ward or forward through available folders.

Press and hold the CAT FOLDER buttonor to fast forward or rewind a track on anMP3 CD.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).

SCAN/RPT:

When the SCAN/RPT play button is pushedwhile the compact disc is played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISCRPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingwill be repeatedALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly

REAR AV (if so equipped):

Press the Rear AV button to toggle the radiobetween CD and DVD modes. When the radiogoes into DVD mode and the DVD player is offthe DVD player will turn on. When the DVD playeris on radio or CD can be selected. The DVDplayer will remain on and broadcast audiothrough the headphones in the rear of the vehicle.The DVD player can be turned off from the radioby selecting the DVD mode and pushing theradio power button. The DVD player will turn offand the radio will go to the last selected mode.

The DVD player can be operated by remote con-trol or by the DVD entertainment system locatedin the center console.

CD EJECT:

Current/Selected disc:

● Press the button, then press the slotnumber (1 – 6) for the desired disc. Thecompact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loadeddisc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected discis not removed within 15 seconds, the discwill reload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 15 seconds, or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pressed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc will ejectand the last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.



AUX jack (if so equipped)

The AUX jack s1 is located above the poweroutlet. The AUX audio input jack accepts anystandard analog audio input such as from a por-table cassette tape player, MP3 player or laptopcomputers.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX jack.

1. SEEK/TRACK button2. TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button3. DISP button4. SCAN/RPT button5. PWR/VOL control knob

6. PRESET A·B·C select button7. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons8. CD button9. FM·AM button10. SAT button*

LHA0733

Type BWHA0732



11. DVD button12. AUX button13. AUDIO and TUNE/TRACK control knob

(BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE and BAL-ANCE)

14. LOAD button15. CD insert slot16. CD eject button

*No satellite radio reception is availablewhen the RADIO button is pressed toaccess satellite radio stations unlessoptional satellite receiver and antennaare installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription isactive. Satellite radio can only be in-stalled in vehicles that were factory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC CHANGER (if soequipped)

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the RADIO button ispressed to access satellite radio stations unlessoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and an XMT or SIRIUS™ satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio canonly be installed in vehicles that were factorypre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is notavailable in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpress the PWR/VOL control knob while the sys-tem is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) whichwas playing immediately before the system wasturned off.

To turn the system off, press the PWR/VOL con-trol knob.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE,FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode asfollows:

BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE→ SSV (if so equipped)

To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade andBalance, press the AUDIO knob until the desiredmode appears in the display. Turn the Tuningknob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desiredlevel. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjustFader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts thesound level between the front and rear speakersand Balance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID orHIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

Clock set

For setting the clock, see “Adjusting the time”earlier in this section.

DISP (display) button:

This DISP (display) button will show text aboutMP3, SAT or CD information in the audio display.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:Disc title ←→ Track title.




Once the display mode is selected, press theAUDIO knob again to store the setting. If theAUDIO knob is not pressed within 8 seconds, thedisplay will refresh with the last selected displaymode setting.

● Track title mode displays the title of the se-lected CD track.

● Disc title mode displays the title of the CDbeing played.

● Track number mode displays the numberselected disc and the track that is currentlybeing played on the disk.

● Disc number mode displays the current discnumber playing in the changer.

MP3 display mode

To change the text displayed when listening to anMP3/WMA CD with MP3/WMA text (when CDwith text is being used), press the DISP button.The DISP button will scroll through the CD text asfollows: Track title ←→ Folder title ←→ Artisttitle ←→ Disc number ←→ Folder number.


Once a display mode is selected, press the AU-DIO knob again to store the setting.

● Folder number mode displays the selectedfolder number and the track number that iscurrently being played.

● Disc number mode displays the selecteddisc number and the track number that iscurrently being played.

● Artist title mode displays the artist title of theMP3/WMA file.

● Track title mode displays the track title of theMP3/WMA file.

● Folder title mode displays the folder namegiven to the MP3 folder.

Display satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISPbutton. The DISP button will scroll through thebroadcast information as follows: Name ←→Title ←→ Current display mode.

To change the default display mode press theAUDIO button to display mode and press theTUNE button to select the following displaymodes: Channel number ←→ Channel name←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode isselected press the AUDIO button again to storethe setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressedafter 8 seconds the display will refresh with thelast selected display mode setting.

● Channel number mode displays the channelnumber of the selected satellite radio sta-tion.

● Channel name mode displays the channelname of the selected satellite radio station.

● Name mode displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Title mode displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operationFM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the FM·AM or SAT (satellite - if soequipped) radio select button will change theband as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT*



When FM·AM or SAT* radio select button ispressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC orON, the radio will come on at the station lastplayed.

The last station played will also come on whenthe POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressedON.

*No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed, and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM orSAT* radio select button is pressed, the compactdisc will automatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

CAT FOLDER (tuning)button:

To manually tune the radio, press the CATFOLDER button or or turn the tun-ing knob to right or left.

To move quickly through the channels, press andhold either the or button down formore than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK/TRACK tuningbutton:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orfor less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to lowor low to high frequencies and stop at the nextbroadcasting station.

To seek quickly through the channels, press andhold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5seconds. When the button is released the radiowill seek to the next broadcasting station.

SCAN RPT tuning (Type A, B and D only):

Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5seconds to stop at each broadcasting station(AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds.Pressing the button again during this 5 secondperiod will stop scan tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPTbutton is not pressed within 5 seconds, scantuning moves to the next station.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.




Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-



rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operationTurn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc will beguided automatically into the slot and start play-ing. To insert the disc, first press the LOADbutton.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing the PWR/VOLcontrol knob will start the compact disc.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discsin the CD changer.

LOAD button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press theLOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Selectthe loading slot by pressing the CD insert selectbutton (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press theLOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD button (Type B and C only):

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radiowill automatically be turned off and the compactdisc will start to play.

CAT FOLDER button:

While playing a CD, press the CAT FOLDERbutton or to fast forward or rewind atrack on a CD.

MP3 CAT FOLDERbutton:

While playing an MP3 CD, press the CATFOLDER button or to scan back-ward or forward through available folders.

Press and hold the CAT FOLDER buttonor to fast forward or rewind a track on anMP3 CD.

SEEK/TRACK:

When the button is pressed for less than1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, thetrack being played returns to its beginning. Pressseveral times to skip back through tracks. Thecompact disc will go back the number of timesthe button is pushed.

When the button is pressed for less than1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing,the next track will start to play from its beginning.Press several times to skip through tracks. Thecompact disc will advance the number of timesthe button is pressed. (When the last track on thecompact disc is skipped through, the first trackwill be played.)

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).



SCAN/RPT:

When the SCAN/RPT play button is pushedwhile the compact disc is played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISCRPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingwill be repeatedALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly

DVD button:

When the DVD button is pushed with the systemoff and a DVD loaded in the DVD player, the DVDwill start to play. When the DVD button is pushedwith the DVD loaded with another audio sourceplaying, the other source will automatically beturned off and the DVD will start to play.

When the radio goes into DVD mode and theDVD player is off the DVD player will turn on.When the DVD player is on radio or CD can beselected. The DVD player will remain on andbroadcast audio through the headphones in the

rear of the vehicle. The DVD player can be turnedoff from the radio by selecting the DVD mode andpushing the radio power button. The DVD playerwill turn off and the radio will go to the lastselected mode.

The DVD player can be operated by remote con-trol or by the DVD entertainment system locatedin the center console.

CD EJECT:

Current/Selected disc:

● Press the button, then press the slotnumber (1 – 6) for the desired disc. Thecompact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loadeddisc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected discis not removed within 15 seconds, the discwill reload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 15 seconds, or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pressed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc will ejectand the last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.



AUX jack (if so equipped)

The AUX jack s1 is located above the poweroutlet. The AUX audio input jack accepts anystandard analog audio input such as from a por-table cassette tape player, MP3 player or laptopcomputers.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX jack.

CD CARE AND CLEANING● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA0733 LHA0049



1. Volume control switch2. MODE select switch3. POWER on/off switch4. Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ONposition, push the POWER switch to turn theaudio system on or off.

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the modein the following sequence: PRESET A → PRE-SET B → PRESET C → CD* → DVD (if soequipped) → AUX**.

*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded.

**This mode is only available when a compatibleauxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for lessthan 1.5 seconds to change presets.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) formore than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ-ous radio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the

present track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the SEEK tuning switch or formore than 1.5 seconds to change the playingdisc up or down.

ANTENNA

Window antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rearpassenger and driver side windows.

CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near therear driver or passenger side windowglass or attach any metal parts to it. Thismay cause poor reception or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the reardriver or passenger side window, becareful not to scratch or damage thewindow antenna. Lightly wipe along theantenna with a dampened soft cloth.

LHA0269



WARNING

● The Mobile Entertainment System isdesigned for rear seat passenger view-ing only.

● The driver must not attempt to operatethe Mobile Entertainment System whilethe vehicle is in motion so that full at-tention may be given to vehicleoperation.

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass breaks, do nottouch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaningthe Mobile Entertainment System com-ponents. Do not use solvents or clean-ing solutions.

● Do not attempt to use the system inextreme temperature conditions [below-4°F (-20°C) or above 158°F (70°C)].

● To avoid draining the vehicle battery, donot operate the system more than 15minutes without starting the engine.

LHA0389

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)



1. EJECT button2. DVD slot3. ENTER button4. POWER on/off button5. MODE button6. Input jacks7. STOP button8. PLAY/PAUSE button9. MENU button10. DISPLAY button11. NAVIGATION keys

DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYERCONTROLSRefer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” laterin this section for the function of each button.

1. POWER button2. STOP button3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVI-

OUS TRACK/CHAPTER button4. TITLE button5. ENTER button

LHA0316

LHA0317



6. DISPLAY button7. MODE button8. SUBTITLE button9. AUDIO button10. ANGLE button11. CLEAR button12. PAUSE button13. PLAY button14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE

button15. MENU button16. NAVIGATION keys17. BACK button18. NUMERIC KEYPADREMOTE CONTROLRefer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” laterin this section for the function of each button.

FLIP-DOWN SCREEN

The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con-trol receiver s1 located at the bottom of thescreen.

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass breaks, do nottouch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

● The screen rotates down to view and upinto the housing to store when not inuse. Ensure that the screen is latchedsecurely into the housing when stored.

LHA0315



HeadphonesPower ON/OFF:

Press the power button to turn the headphoneson or off.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol-ume.

The headphones will automatically be turned offin 30 seconds if there is no sound during thatperiod. To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, keep the power supply turned off whennot in use.

PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC(DVD)

CAUTION

● Only operate the DVD while the vehicleengine is running. Operating the DVDfor extended periods of time with theengine OFF can discharge the vehiclebattery.

● Do not allow the system to get wet.Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-uids may cause the system tomalfunction.

● The driver must not attempt to wear theheadphones while the vehicle is in mo-tion so that full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

● While playing video CD media, this DVDplayer does not guarantee completefunctionality of all video CD formats.

With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-pendently of the front seat.

Press the DVD or CD/REAR AV button locatedon the front controls to hear the sound of the DVDplayer through the speakers.

SAA0720 SAA0721



It is possible to operate the DVD player by remotecontrol.

Headphones are a wireless type and no cablesare necessary. You can use them in almost all theranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to usethe headphones in the front seat.)

POWER on/off button:

With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or ONposition, press the POWER button to turn theDVD player on or off.

Insert the DVD into the slot with the label sidefacing up. The DVD will be guided automaticallyinto the slot.

If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, theDVD player will automatically turn on.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into theslot. This could damage the player.

MODE select button:

Press the MODE button to select Audio/Videosource between DVD and AUX input (input jackson the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =Video input).

The display will show the “AUX” in the upper leftcorner of the display for 4 seconds once theMode is changed to AUX.

To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary inputjacks” in this section.

or PLAY:

When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player orthe PLAY button on the remote control ispressed, the player will play.

In play mode, the display will briefly showon the upper left corner of the display.

FF (Fast Forward), REW(Remote control only):

Press FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but-tons to carry out the fast forward or fast reversepresentation at 5 times normal play speed.

Press FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but-tons again or PLAY button to resume the normalplay speed.

NEXT CHAPTER/PREVIOUS CHAPTER(Remote control only):

When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button ispressed while the DVD is being played, the pro-gram next to the present one will start to play fromits beginning. Press several times to skip through

programs. The DVD will advance the number oftimes the button is pressed. When the(PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, theprogram being played returns to its beginning.Press several times to skip back through pro-grams. The DVD will go back the number of timesthe button is pressed.

or PAUSE:

When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player orthe PAUSE button on the remote control ispressed, the player will pause playing of themedia. In pause mode, the player will showon the upper left corner of the display until theplayer is changed to another mode.

STOP:

Press the STOP button once to stop playing themedia. The display will show in the upperleft corner of the display for 4 seconds, and thelast disc position will be stored. When the PLAYbutton is pressed again, it will resume at thestored disc track and time position.

If the STOP button is pressed again when theplayer is already in Stop mode, it will reinitializethe pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect itwill ignore the last stored disc position and uponreceipt of the next play message it will begin atthe Title Menu, or at “the beginning of the disc”.



EJECT:

When the EJECT button is pressed with the DVDloaded, it will be ejected.

The display will show the EJECT symbol inthe upper left corner of the display for 4 secondsonce the EJECT button is pressed.

If the DVD is not loaded, the display will show“NO DISC”.

If the DVD comes out and is not removed within25 seconds, it will be pulled back into the slot toprotect it.

DISPLAY:

If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2seconds, the display menu will appear on thescreen.

● The display menu will remain on the screenfor 10 seconds if no subsequent controlactivations occur.

● Use NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate withinthe display menu, and use ENTER to selectthe item.

● Holding the DISPLAY control on the face-plate for longer than approximately 2 sec-onds while in the display menu will reset thedisplay characteristics to their nominal val-ues. (Faceplate feature only)

If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate ispressed for more than 2 seconds, the mediatrack/time information will be displayed along thebottom of the display. Pressing the DISPLAYcontrol for more than 2 seconds will remove themedia track/time information from the display.(Faceplate feature only)

NAVIGATION KEYS:

If media is in PLAY mode, activation of the NAVI-GATION KEYS (Up, Down, Left, and Right) willperform the following functions: nextchapter/track, previous chapter/track, fast re-verse and fast forward, and the display willshow , , and respec-tively in the upper left corner of the display for 4seconds. (Faceplate feature only)

If media is in PAUSE mode, activation of theNAVIGATION KEYS (Up, Down and Right) willperform the following functions: nextchapter/track, previous chapter/track and slowforward, and the display will show ,and a forward arrow symbol respectively in theupper left corner of the display for 4 seconds.(Faceplate feature only)

If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,Down, Left, and Right within the menu.

If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATIONKEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,and Right within the menu.

ENTER:

In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to se-lect MENU items.

In the display menu, press the ENTER button toselect items for modification, as per the on-screen instructions.

MENU:

If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENUbutton is pressed, the DVD menu will appear onthe screen. Use Navigation Keys to navigatewithin the menu, and use ENTER to select theitem.

Press the MENU button again to return to PLAYmode.

TITLE (Remote control only):

Press TITLE button to return the DVD media tothe “title” of the DVD.

Press TITLE button again to return to the previousstop point and play.

BACK (Remote control only):

Press the BACK button to exit the current activemenu and return to the previous menu.



SUBTITLE (Remote control only):

Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitleselection menu.

Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cyclethrough each available subtitle.

AUDIO (Remote control only):

Press the AUDIO button to call up audio menu.

Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cyclethrough each available audio track.

ANGLE (Remote control only):

Press the ANGLE button to call up camera anglemenu.

Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cyclethrough each available angle.

CLEAR (Remote control only):

Press the CLEAR button to clear all numericinputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the3-second timer.

NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10) (Remotecontrol only):

Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly accessdisc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting theirnumeric value.

The “≥10” button input numbers greater than orequal to 10, allowing up three digits to be inputfor selecting chapter/title/track number.

The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons willcontinuously shift the previously input number tothe “left”.

The chapter/title/track number will be automati-cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.

The operator can cancel the inputchapter/title/track number by actuating theCLEAR control prior to the expiration of the3-second timer.

These functions can be used only for the DVDdiscs which correspond to them.

Auxiliary input jacks

The auxiliary input jacks are located on the controlpanel. Compatible devices such as video games,camcorders and portable video players can beconnected to the auxiliary jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-tion purposes.

● Yellow - video input

● White - left channel audio input

● Red - right channel audio input

CARE AND MAINTENANCEUse a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean thesurfaces of your NISSAN mobile entertainmentsystem. (DVD player face, screen, remote con-trol, etc.)

CAUTION

● Do not use any solvents or cleaningsolutions when cleaning the videosystem.

● Do not use excessive force on the moni-tor screen.

● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-tor screen as it may become dirty ordamaged.

● Do not attempt to use the system inextreme temperature conditions [below-4°F (-20°C) or above 158°F (70°C)].

● Do not attempt to operate the system inextreme humidity conditions (less than10% or more than 75%).



HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD

CAUTION

● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional recordcleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-tended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on its innerand outer edges. Remove the roughedges using the side of a pen or pencilas illustrated.

● Never attempt to use a DVD that hasbeen cracked, deformed, or repairedusing adhesive. Doing so may causedamage to the equipment.

● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may notbe read properly.

● Do not write, draw or attach anything on anyside of the DVD.

● Do not store the DVD in locations with directsunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.

● Always place discs in the storage case whenthey are not being used.

● Do not put on any sticker or write anythingon either surface of the DVD.

DVD player operation precautions

Do not use the following DVDs as they maycause the DVD player to malfunction:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

LHA0049

LHA0484



● DVDs with a region code other than“1”. The region code sA is displayed ina small symbol printed on the top ofthe DVD sB

● DVDs that are not round

● DVDs with a paper label

● DVDs that are warped, scratched, orhave unequal edges

● Recordable digital video discs(DVD+R)

● Rewritable digital video discs(DVD+RW)

If a DVD with a paper label is used andbecomes jammed you may be able to resetthe unit and eject the jammed disc with thefollowing procedure:

1. Record the radio presets.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal fromthe battery for five minutes.

3. Reconnect the negative battery termi-nal.

4. Check to see if the jammed DVD hasbeen ejected. If it has not, try to ejectthe DVD by pushing the eject button.

5. If the disc cannot be ejected see yourNissan dealer for further assistance.

6. Re-program the radio presets.

Remote control and headphonesbattery replacement

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid.

2. Replace batteries with new ones.

● Size AA (remote control)

● Size AAA (headphones)

Make sure that the and ends onthe batteries match the markings inside thecompartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

LHA0318



If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, close the lid se-curely.

● If you will not be using the remote control forlong periods of time, remove the batteries.

● Replacement of the batteries is neededwhen the remote control only functions atextremely close distances to the DVD playeror not at all.

● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.

● An improperly disposed battery can harmthe environment. Always confirm local regu-lations for battery disposal.

● When changing batteries, do not let dust oroil get on the remote control and head-phones.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment. This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of thedevice.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions, otherwise the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

SAA0723

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO



● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Doingso, will bypass the variable voltage con-trol system and the vehicle battery maynot charge completely. Refer to “Vari-able voltage control system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion later in this manual.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.




MEMO

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-3On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-32Hill start assist (HSA) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-33Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35


WARNING



EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the lift gate and rear windowsclosed while driving, otherwise exhaustgases could be drawn into the passen-ger compartment. If you must drive withthe lift gate or rear windows open, fol-low these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton (if so equipped) to off and the fancontrol dial to 4 (high) to circulatethe air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the lift gate or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:a. The vehicle is raised for service.b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving


CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres-sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tire pres-sure of the spare tire.

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example aflat tire while driving).

Starting and driving 5-3


● The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressureis adjusted. After the tire is inflated to therecommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tirepressure warning light. Use a tire pressuregauge to check the tire pressure.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all four tires.

● You can also check the pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display screen.The order of the tire pressure figures dis-played on the screen does not correspondwith the actual order of the tire position. See“Tire pressure information” in the “Displayscreen, heater, air conditioner and audiosystems” section.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section, “Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section forchanging a flat tire.)



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarilyinterfere with the operation of the TPMS andcause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radiofrequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies isbeing used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or aDC/AC converter is being used in or near thevehicle.



FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROADDRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-ger cars to make them capable of performing in avariety of on-pavement and off-road applications.This gives them a higher center of gravity thanordinary cars. An advantage of higher groundclearance is a better view of the road, allowingyou to anticipate problems. However, they are notdesigned for cornering at the same speeds asconventional two-wheel drive vehicles any morethan low-slung sports cars are designed to per-

form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If atall possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. Aswith other vehicles of this type, failure to operatethis vehicle correctly may result in loss of controlor vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read the driving safety precautionslater in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As withany vehicle, loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects, orcause the vehicle to roll over, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, andavoid driving when tired. Never drive when underthe influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which maycause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt asoutlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisionsand rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedor improperly belted person is significantlymore likely to be injured or killed than aperson properly wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is considered



to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal andoff-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed forleisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-hicle.

Remember that two-wheel drive models are lesscapable than four-wheel drive models for roughroad driving and extrication when stuck in deepsnow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

● Drive carefully when off the road andavoid dangerous areas. Every personwho drives or rides in this vehicleshould be seated with their seat beltfastened. This will keep you and yourpassengers in position when drivingover rough terrain.

● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-stead drive either straight up or straightdown the slopes. Off-road vehicles cantip over sideways much more easilythan they can forward or backward.

● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.If you drive up them, you may stall. Ifyou drive down them, you may not beable to control your speed. If you driveacross them, you may roll over.

● Do not shift gears while driving ondownhill grades as this could causeloss of control of the vehicle.

● Stay alert when driving to the top of ahill. At the top there could be a drop-offor other hazard that could cause anaccident.

● If your engine stalls or you cannot makeit to the top of a steep hill, never at-tempt to turn around. Your vehiclecould tip or roll over. Always backstraight down in R (Reverse) gear. Neverback down in N (Neutral) or with theclutch depressed (manual transmissionvehicles), using only the brake, as thiscould cause loss of control.

● Heavy braking going down a hill couldcause your brakes to overheat and fade,resulting in loss of control and an acci-dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a lowgear to control your speed. Use the HillDescent Control feature (if so equipped).

● Unsecured cargo can be thrown aroundwhen driving over rough terrain. Prop-erly secure all cargo so it will not bethrown forward and cause injury to youor your passengers.



● To avoid raising the center of gravityexcessively, do not exceed the ratedcapacity of the roof rack/gear bin (if soequipped) and evenly distribute theload. Secure heavy loads in the cargoarea as far forward and as low as pos-sible. Do not equip the vehicle with tireslarger than specified in this manual.This could cause your vehicle to roll over.

● Do not grip the inside or spokes of thesteering wheel when driving off-road.The steering wheel could move sud-denly and injure your hands. Insteaddrive with your fingers and thumbs onthe outside of the rim.

● Before operating the vehicle, ensurethat the driver and all passengers havetheir seat belts fastened.

● Always drive with the floor mats inplace as the floor may become hot.

● Lower your speed when encounteringstrong crosswinds. With a higher centerof gravity, your NISSAN is more af-fected by strong side winds. Slowerspeeds ensure better vehicle control.

● Do not drive beyond the performancecapability of the tires, even with 4WDengaged.

● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may result indrivetrain damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personalinjury.

● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer(such as the dynamometers used bysome states for emissions testing), orsimilar equipment even if the other twowheels are raised off the ground. Makesure you inform test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer.Using the wrong test equipment mayresult in drivetrain damage or unex-pected vehicle movement which couldresult in serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

● Accelerating quickly, sharp steeringmaneuvers or sudden braking maycause loss of control.

● If at all possible, avoid sharp turningmaneuvers, particularly at high speeds.Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle

has a higher center of gravity than atwo-wheel drive vehicle. The vehicle isnot designed for cornering at the samespeeds as conventional two-wheeldrive vehicles. Failure to operate thisvehicle correctly could result in loss ofcontrol and/or a rollover accident.

● Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,or radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Install tire chains on the rearwheels when driving on slippery roadsand drive carefully.

● Be sure to check the brakes immedi-ately after driving in mud or water. See“Brake system” later in this section for“Wet brakes”.

● Avoid parking your vehicle on steephills. If you get out of the vehicle and itrolls forward, backward or sideways,you could be injured.

● Whenever you drive off-road throughsand, mud or water as deep as thewheel hub, more frequent maintenancemay be required. See “Periodic mainte-nance” in the “NISSAN Service andMaintenance Guide.”



WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONThe ignition lock is designed so the key cannot beturned to the LOCK position and removed untilthe shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park)position.

When removing the key from the ignition, makesure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)position.

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCKposition.

To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-tion with the key in the ON position.

2. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

3. Remove the key from the ignition.

If the selector lever is shifted to the P (Park)position after the key is turned to the OFF posi-tion or when the key cannot be turned to theLOCK position, proceed as follows to remove thekey.

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ONposition.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannotmoved out of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFFposition or if the key is removed from the switch.

The shift selector lever can be moved if theignition switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed.

WSD0041

IGNITION SWITCH



There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ACC positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.When the ignition is in the OFF position,the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-tion, turn the steering wheel to the left orright while turning the key to unlock thekey cylinder.

KEY POSITIONSLOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.



● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid asfrequently as possible, or at least wheneveryou refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe key is turned to the ON (3) position. See“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park) and into any ofthe other gear positions if the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position or ifthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector lever is in any of thedriving positions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionkey to START. Release the key when theengine starts. If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition key to START. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running fora minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting itoff. Starting and stopping the engine over ashort period of time may make the vehiclemore difficult to start.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE



AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1.Always depress the brake pedal untilshifting is completed. Failure to do socould cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

CAUTION

● When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrake should be used for this purpose.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to produce maximumpower and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before attempting to movethe shift selector lever out of the P (Park)position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed sothe foot brake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to any driveposition while the ignition switch is in theON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be movedout of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turnedto the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if thekey is removed.

To move the selector lever:

: Push the button while depressing thebrake pedal

: Push the button to shift

: Shift without depressing brake pedal

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector lever out of theP (Park) position.

LSD0151

DRIVING THE VEHICLE



WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position forany reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), orany D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turnedto the LOCK position and be removed from theignition switch. Move the selector lever to the P(Park) position, then the key can be turned toLOCK.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine. Make surethe vehicle is completely stopped. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the se-lector lever from N (Neutral) or any driveposition to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakefirst, then shift the selector lever into the P (Park)position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure thevehicle is completely stopped before selectingthe R (Reverse) position. The brake pedalmust be depressed to move the selectorlever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any driveposition to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

3 (Third gear):

Use this position for driving up and down longslopes where engine braking would be advanta-geous.

Do not downshift into the 3 position at speedsover the following and do not exceed the follow-ing speeds in the 3 position.

2WD and AUTO:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

2 (Second gear):

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-ing on downhill grades.


2WD and AUTO:

71 MPH (115 km/h)

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)



1 (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,or for maximum engine braking on steep downhillgrades.


2WD and AUTO:

43 MPH (70 km/h)

4H:

43 MPH (70 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector levermay not be moved from the P (Park) position evenwith the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shiftlock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will belocked unless the ignition switch is turned to theON position. This allows the vehicle to be movedif the battery is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key


3. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu-tral) position while holding down the shiftlock release.

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock thesteering wheel. Now the vehicle may bemoved to the desired location.

If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out ofP (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-matic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

LSD0141



Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Overdrive switch

Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.

ON: With the engine running and theshift selector lever in the D (Drive)position, the transmission upshiftsinto Overdrive as vehicle speedincreases.

Overdrive does not engage until the enginehas reached operating temperature.

OFF: For driving up and down longslopes where engine braking is nec-essary push the Overdrive switchonce. The O/D OFF indicator lightin the instrument panel comes on atthis time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing agentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shiftshocks as the transmission shifts into and out ofOverdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. TheO/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panelcomes on at this time.

When driving conditions change, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-tended periods of time with the Overdrive off.This reduces fuel economy.

LSD0142



WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and itwill release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. ON/OFF switch4. CANCEL switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control main switch off and have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

LSD0158 WSD0153

PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL



● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control main switch is turned ON whilepushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, orCANCEL switch (located on the steeringwheel). To properly set the cruise control sys-tem, use the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the mainswitch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in the instru-ment panel comes on. Take your foot off the accel-erator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISEindicator light and SET indicator light in theinstrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake pedal while pushingthe ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.The preset speed is deleted from memory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you move the shift selector lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).



CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.Improper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use 4H or 4L position only whennecessary. Four-wheel drive operation low-ers fuel economy.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY



WARNING

● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may result indrivetrain damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personalinjury.

● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer(such as the dynamometers used bysome states for emissions testing), orsimilar equipment even if the other twowheels are raised off the ground. Makesure you inform test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer.Using the wrong test equipment mayresult in drivetrain damage or unex-pected vehicle movement which couldresult in serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

CAUTION

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surfaceroads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WDvehicles, stop the vehicle and shiftthe transmission selector to the Nposition with the brake pedal de-pressed and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for part time 4WDvehicles, stop the vehicle and shiftthe transmission selector to the Nposition with the brake pedal de-pressed and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.


● The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warninglight blinking rapidly.

All mode 4WD system (if soequipped)The all mode 4WD system provides 4 positions(AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can selectthe desired drive mode according to the drivingconditions.

USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE(4WD)



2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD ShiftSwitch Position

WheelsDriven

Indicator LightUse Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer 4LO position

AUTO

Rearwheels or4 wheels

For driving on paved or slippery roads

Move the 4WD switch.2WD <—> AUTO <—> 4H4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position engaged.IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE TRANSMISSION SELEC-TOR TO THE (N) POSITION IN THIS OPERATION. PERFORM THISOPERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.

2WD

Rearwheels

For driving on dry, paved roads (Economydrive) or state dynamometer I/M testing

4H

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-covered roads

Neutral

*1May blink

Neutral disengages the automatic trans-mission mechanical parking lock, whichwill allow the vehicle to roll. Do not leavethe transfer shift position in Neutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.2. Shift the transmission selector to the (N) position.3. Depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H with the

brake pedal depressed.YOU CANNOT MOVE THE TRANSFER 4WD SHIFT SWITCH BE-TWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU FIRST STOPTHE VEHICLE DEPRESS THE BRAKE AND SHIFT THE TRANSMIS-SION SELECTOR LEVER TO THE NEUTRAL (N) POSITION, THENDEPRESS AND TURN THE 4WD SHIFT SWITCH TO 4LO OR 4H.*3

4LO 4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum power and trac-tion is required (for example: on steepgrades or rocky, sandy, muddy roads)

*1: The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink. Stop the vehicle. Be sure to shift the 4WD shift switch after the transmission selector has been shifted to the N position. If the indicator light keepsblinking after the 4WD shift procedure in the previous page, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while. Then the light will turn on or off.• Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO. Otherwise gears may grind, damaging the drive system.*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) tobe operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light (if so equipped) will also turn on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicledynamic control system” later in this section.



The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used toselect either 2WD or 4WD depending on thedriving conditions. There are four types of drivemodes available, AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls thetransfer case operation. Rotate the switch tomove between each mode, 2WD, AUTO, 4H and4LO.

You must depress the switch to select 4LO,and the vehicle MUST be stationary and theautomatic transmission selector lever inthe N position when changing into or out of4LO.

WARNING

When parking, apply the parking brakebefore stopping the engine and make surethat the 4WD shift indicator light is on andthe ATP warning light goes off. Otherwise,the vehicle could unexpectedly move evenif the automatic transmission is in the Pposition.

CAUTION

● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

● The 4H position provides greater trac-tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it willcause increased fuel consumption andhigher oil temperatures, and coulddamage drivetrain components.Speeds over 62.5 MPH (100 km/h) in 4His not recommended.

● The 4LO position provides maximumtraction. Avoid raising vehicle speed ex-cessively, as the maximum speed is ap-proximately 31 MPH (50 km/h).

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4Hposition. Do not move the 4WD shiftswitch when making a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-tween 2WD, AUTO and 4H) while drivingon steep downhill grades. Use the en-gine brake and low automatic transmis-sion gears (D1 or D2) for enginebraking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) with therear wheels spinning.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dryhard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may causeunnecessary noise and tire wear.NISSAN recommends driving in the2WD or AUTO position under theseconditions.

● The 4WD transfer case may not beshifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-bient temperatures and the transfer4LO position indicator light may blinkeven when the 4WD shift switch isshifted. After driving for a while you canchange the 4WD transfer case between4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

● Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO, 4H or4LO.

● Drive carefully according to the road surfaceconditions.

When the vehicle is stuck,

● Place stones or wooden blocks under thetires to free the vehicle.

● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.



● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeatforward and backward movement to in-crease the movement.

● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire chainsmay be effective.

CAUTION

● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tireswill sink deep into the mud, making itdifficult to free the vehicle.

● Avoid shifting gears with the enginerunning at high speeds as this maycause malfunction.

Part time 4WD system (if soequipped)The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select thedesired drive mode according to the driving con-ditions.



2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD ShiftSwitch Position

WheelsDriven

Indicator LightUse Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer 4LO position

2WD

Rearwheels

For driving on dry, paved roads (Economydrive) or state dynamometer I/M testing

Move the 4WD switch.2WD <—> 4H4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position engaged.IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO SHIFT THE TRANSMISSION SELEC-TOR LEVER TO THE N POSITION IN THIS OPERATION. PERFORMTHIS OPERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.

4H

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-covered roads

Neutral*1May blink

Neutral disengages the automatic trans-mission mechanical parking lock, whichwill allow the vehicle to roll. Do not leavethe transfer shift position in Neutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.2. Shift the transmission selector to the (N) position with the brake

pedal depressed.3. Depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H with the

brake pedal depressed.THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THEVEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THETRANSMISSION SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3

4LO 4 wheelsIlluminated

For use when maximum power and trac-tion is required (for example: on steepgrades or rocky, sandy, muddy roads)

*1: Before moving the transmission selector shift lever from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed and the transfer gear iscorrectly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch 9OFF9.2. Start the engine.- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the transmission selector lever to Neutral position.4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode.- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the transmission selector lever from Neutral position.*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) tobe operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light (if so equipped) will also turn on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicledynamic control system” later in this section.



The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used toselect either 2WD or 4WD depending on thedriving conditions. There are three types of drivemodes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls thetransfer case operation. Rotate the switch tomove between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicleMUST be stationary, shift the transmissionselector to Neutral (N), and depress thebrake pedal. The switch must be depressedand turned when changing into or out of4LO.

WARNING

● When parking, apply the parking brakebefore stopping the engine and makesure that the 4WD shift indicator light ison and the ATP warning light goes off.Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect-edly move even if the automatic trans-mission is in the P position.

● The 4LO indicator light must stop blink-ing and remain illuminated or turn offbefore shifting the transmission intogear. If the transmission selector isshifted from the (N) position to anyother gear when the 4LO indicator lightis blinking, the vehicle may moveunexpectedly.

CAUTION


● The 4H position provides greater trac-tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it willcause increased fuel consumption andhigher oil temperatures, and coulddamage drivetrain components.Speeds over 62.5 MPH (100 km/h) in 4His not recommended.

● The 4LO position provides maximumtraction. Avoid raising vehicle speed ex-cessively, as the maximum speed is ap-proximately 31 MPH (50 km/h).

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.Do not move the 4WD shift switch whenmaking a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-tween 2WD and 4H) while driving onsteep downhill grades. Use the enginebrake and low automatic transmissiongears (D1 or D2) for engine braking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD and 4H) with the rearwheels spinning.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dryhard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may causeunnecessary noise and tire wear.NISSAN recommends driving in the2WD position under these conditions.

● The 4WD transfer case may not beshifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-bient temperatures and the transfer4LO position indicator light may blinkeven when the 4WD shift switch isshifted. After driving for a while you canchange the 4WD transfer case between4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,


● Drive carefully according to the road surfaceconditions.

When the vehicle is stuck,




● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeatforward and backward movement to in-crease the movement.

● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, placestones or wooden blocks under the tires.Then try the recovery procedures above. Tirechains may be effective.

CAUTION

● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tireswill sink deep into the mud, making itdifficult to free the vehicle.

● Avoid shifting gears with the enginerunning at high speeds as this maycause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations

● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the2WD, AUTO (Type A only), 4H or 4LO po-sition, depending on driving conditions.

● With the switch set to the AUTO position(Type A only), distribution of torque to thefront and rear wheels changes automatically,depending on road conditions encountered[ratio; 0 : 100 (2WD) → 50 : 50 (4WD)].This results in improved driving stability.

● If the 4WD shift switch is operatedwhile making a turn, accelerating ordecelerating or if the key switch isturned off while in the AUTO (Type Aonly), 4H or 4LO, you may feel a jolt.This is not abnormal.

● When the vehicle is stopped after mak-ing a turn, you may feel a slight joltafter the selector lever is shifted to N orP. This occurs because the transferclutch is released and not because of amalfunction.

Type ALSD0144

Type BLSD0145



CAUTION

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4Hposition. Do not move the 4WD shiftswitch when making a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch whiledriving on steep downhill grades. Usethe engine brake and low automatictransmission gears (D1 or D2) for en-gine braking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switchwith the rear wheels spinning.

● Before placing the 4WD shift switch inthe 4H position from 2WD or AUTO,ensure the vehicle speed is less than62.5 MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do socan damage the 4WD system.


● Engine idling speed is high while warm-ing up the engine. Be especially carefulwhen starting or driving on slippery sur-faces with the 4WD shift switch set inAUTO.

4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in theodometer display.

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator light will illuminate the position selected bythe 4WD shift switch.

● The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode tothe other. When the shifting is com-pleted, the 4WD shift indicator lightwill come on. For all mode 4WD ve-hicles, if the indicator light does notcome on immediately, make sure the

area around the vehicle is safe, anddrive the vehicle straight, accelerate ordecelerate or move the vehicle in re-verse, then shift the 4WD shift switch.

● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the4WD indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

● When the 4WD shift switch is turned tothe AUTO position at low ambient tem-peratures, the 4WD shift indicator lightmay show 4H. If this happens, all fourwheels are driven as torque distributionis in the 4H position. Be careful as thevehicle may become difficult to turn.When the vehicle is driven, the 4WDshift indicator light should change toAUTO.

● If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-tion changes to 2WD when the 4WDshift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4Hposition at low ambient temperatures,the 2WD mode may be being engageddue to malfunctioning drive system. Ifthe indicator does not return to normaland the 4WD warning light comes on,have the system checked by the nearestNISSAN dealer.

LSD0147



4WD warning light

Warning light Comes on or blinkswhen:

Comes onThere is a malfunc-tion in the 4–wheel

drive system

Blinks rapidly

The transfer caseoil temperature is

abnormally high (allmode 4WD ve-

hicles)

Blinks slowlyThe difference inwheel rotation is

large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.

The 4WD warning light comes on when the keyswitch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after theengine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD systemwhen the key switch is ON, the warning light willeither remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WDshift indicator light goes out.

For all mode 4WD vehicles, high-temperaturetransfer case oil makes the warning light blinkrapidly (about twice per second). If the warninglight blinks rapidly during operation, stop the ve-hicle in a safe place immediately. Then if the lightgoes off after a while, you can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of frontand rear wheels will make the warning light blinkslowly (about once per two seconds). Changethe 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drivefast.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksslowly during operation or rapidly afterstopping the vehicle for a while, haveyour vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.

● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is notrecommended when the 4WD warninglight turns on.

● When the warning light comes on, the2WD mode may be engaged even if the4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H. Beespecially careful when driving. If corre-sponding parts are malfunctioning, the4WD mode will not be engaged even ifthe 4WD shift switch is shifted.

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surfaceroads:

– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the4WD shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WDvehicles, stop the vehicle and shiftthe transmission selector to the Nposition and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for part time 4WDvehicles, stop the vehicle and shiftthe transmission selector to the Nposition with the brake pedal de-pressed and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.




● The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warninglight blinking rapidly.

WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shiftlever has been pushed as far forward asit can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS



● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: sA

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: sB

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: sC

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will beharder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM



WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is asophisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces. Remem-ber that stopping distances on slipperysurfaces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-sible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size and typeas specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See “Tire andLoading Information label” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls thebrakes so the wheels do not lock during hardbraking or when braking on slippery surfaces.The system detects the rotation speed at eachwheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding. Bypreventing each wheel from locking, the systemhelps the driver maintain steering control andhelps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.



WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may heara “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and does not indicate amalfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates theABS warning light on the instrument panel. Thebrake system then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during theself-test or while driving, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5- 10 km/h).

When the ABS senses that one or more wheelsare close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap-plies and releases hydraulic pressure.

This action is similar to pumping the brakes veryquickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brakepedal and hear a noise from under the hood orfeel a vibration from the actuator when it is oper-ating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS isoperating properly. However, the pulsation mayindicate that road conditions are hazardous andextra care is required while driving.

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur-faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detectthese movements and control the braking andengine output to help improve vehicle stability.

● When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC)system is operating, the SLIP indicator in theinstrument panel blinks.

● If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LOthe indicator light will come on andthe VDC system will be turned off. See“Transfer case shifting procedures” earlier inthis section.

● If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi-tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust yourspeed and driving to these conditions. See“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamiccontrol (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-struments and controls” section.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac-tion control system may be disabled and theSLIP and indicator lights will not turn offafter 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turnedto the ON position. Perform the following proce-dure to reset the system:

● Start the engine and set the steering wheelin the straight forward position.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM (if so equipped)



● Drive the vehicle at speeds above 10 mph(15 km/h) for at least 10 minutes.

● The VDC OFF indicator light should go offindicating the traction control system is op-erational.

● If you interrupt the reset procedure by turn-ing the ignition off, you will need to restartthe reset procedure.

If after driving the vehicle for more than 10 min-utes and the SLIP and lights remain illumi-nated in the instrument panel, have the vehicledynamic control system checked by a NISSANdealer.

If the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamiccontrol system off using the VDC OFF switch,most VDC functions will be turned off. The VDCsystem will still try to transfer power from a slip-ping drive wheel to one with more traction whenthe VDC system switch is OFF. The Slip indicatorwill flash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS willstill operate with the VDC system off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feela pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise orvibration from under the hood. This is normal andindicates that the VDC system is working prop-erly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The vehicle dynamic control system isdesigned to help improve driving stabil-ity but does not prevent accidents dueto abrupt steering operation at highspeeds or by careless or dangerousdriving techniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especially careful whendriving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the vehicle dynamic controlsystem may not operate properly andthe vehicle dynamic control off indica-tor light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer barsand bushings are not NISSAN approvedfor your vehicle or are extremely dete-riorated the vehicle dynamic controlsystem may not operate properly. Thiscould adversely affect vehicle handlingperformance, and the VDC OFF indica-tor light may come on.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the vehicle dynamic control system maynot operate properly and the VDC OFFindicator light may come on. Do notdrive on these types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the vehicle dynamic control offindicator light may illuminate. This isnot a malfunction. Restart the engineafter driving onto a stable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the vehicle dy-namic control system may not operateproperly and the vehicle dynamic con-trol off indicator light may come on.



● The vehicle dynamic control system isnot a substitute for winter tires or tirechains on a snow covered road.

WARNING

● Never rely solely on the hill descentcontrol system to control vehicle speedwhen driving on steep down hill grades.Always drive carefully and attentivelywhen using the hill descent control sys-tem and decelerate the vehicle speedby depressing the brake pedal if neces-sary. Be especially careful when drivingon frozen, muddy or an extremely steepdownhill roads. Failure to control ve-hicle speed may result in a loss of con-trol of the vehicle and possible seriousinjury or death.

● The hill descent control may not controlthe vehicle speed on a hill under all loador road conditions. Always be preparedto depress the brake pedal to controlvehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-sult in a collision or serious personalinjury.

The hill descent control system helps maintainvehicle speed when driving under 15-21 mph(25-35 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hilldescent control is useful when engine brakingalone in 4H or 4L cannot control vehicle speed.Hill descent control applies the vehicle brakes tocontrol vehicle speed allowing the driver to con-

centrate on steering while reducing the burden ofbrake and accelerator operation.

● When additional braking is required onsteep downhill roads activate the hilldescent control system by pushing theswitch ON, see “Hill descent control switch”in the “Instruments and controls” section.

● Once the system is activated the indicatorlight will remain on in the instrument panel,see “Hill descent control system on indicatorlight” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressedwhile the hill descent control system is on, thesystem will stop operating temporarily. As soonas the accelerator or brake pedal is released, thehill descent control system begins to functionagain if the hill descent control operating condi-tions are fulfilled.

For the best results, when descending steepdownhill grades, the hill descent control switchshould be ON and the selector lever in 2 (Secondgear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine braking.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (ifso equipped)



WARNING

● Never rely solely on the hill start assistsystem to prevent the vehicle from mov-ing backward on a hill. Always drivecarefully and attentively. Depress thebrake pedal when the vehicle isstopped on a steep hill. Be especiallycareful when stopped on a hill on frozenor muddy roads. Failure to prevent thevehicle from rolling backwards may re-sult in a loss of control of the vehicleand possible serious injury or death.

● The hill start assist system is not de-signed to hold the vehicle at a standstillon a hill. Depress the brake pedal whenthe vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.Failure to do so may cause the vehicleto roll backwards and may result in acollision or serious personal injury.

● The hill start assist may not prevent thevehicle from rolling backwards on a hillunder all load or road conditions. Al-ways be prepared to depress the brakepedal to prevent the vehicle from rollingbackwards. Failure to do so may resultin a collision or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically keepsthe brakes applied to help prevent the vehiclefrom rolling backwards in the time it takes thedriver to release the brake pedal and apply theaccelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

Hill start assist will operate automatically underthe following conditions:

● The selector lever is shifted to a forward orreverse gear.

● The vehicle is stopped completely on a hillby applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hillstart assist will stop operating completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the selectorlever is shifted to N or P or on a flat and level road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if soequipped).

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

HILL START ASSIST (HSA) SYSTEM(if so equipped)

COLD WEATHER DRIVING



DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.



ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

Engine block heaters are available throughNISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperaturestarting. The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) orlower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine blockheater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extensioncord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged infor at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outsidetemperatures, to properly warm the enginecoolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn theengine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-erly store the cord to keep it away frommoving parts.

WARNING

● Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-riously injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

● Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.

● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plugthe extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use theproper extension cord or a groundedoutlet can result in a fire or electricalshock and cause serious personalinjury.




MEMO

6 In case of emergency

First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-14


A first aid kit is located on the back door trimpanel. To remove the first aid kit:

s1 Squeeze the latch buttons.

s2 Pull the two straps apart to unfasten.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-sure of all tires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. Ifequipped, the system also displays pressure ofall tires (except the spare tire) on the displayscreen by sending a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel. If the vehicle is beingdriven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressurewarning light. This system will activate only whenthe vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). For more details, refer to“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tirepressure information” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section.

LCE0104

FIRST AID KIT FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency


WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible.



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Move the shift selector lever to P(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the automatic transmissionis shifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

In case of emergency 6-3


Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks s1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tires2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

1. Jack2. Jack toolsGetting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the back door.

2. Lift the handle on the floor and open thestorage area.

3. Remove the jack and jack tools.

4. Find the oval-shaped opening above themiddle of the bumper. Pass the T-shapedend of the jack rod through the opening anddirect it toward the spare tire winch, locateddirectly above the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it isdesigned to be inserted at an angle asshown.

WCE0044 LCE0105 LCE0106



5. Fit the square end of the jack rod into thesquare hole of the wheel nut wrench to forma handle.

6. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod intothe T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap-ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged inthe spare tire winch and turn the jack rodcounterclockwise to lower the spare tire.

7. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,reach under the vehicle, remove the retainerchain, and carefully slide the tire from underthe rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-ing plate on the wheel and then lift thespare tire.

Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Always refer to the illustration for the correctplacement and jack-up points for your specificvehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

LCE0107



2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Thejack-up points are indicated by stamped ar-rows on the side of the frame.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jackas shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until thetire clears the ground.

WCE0139 LCE0087



5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove thetire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-hicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

WCE0063



Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information label affixed tothe driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display of the tire pres-sure information may show higher pres-sure than the COLD tire pressure after thevehicle has been driven more than 1 mile(1.6 km). This is because the tire pressureincreases as the tire temperature rises.This does not indicate a system malfunc-tion.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING



● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift leverto N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P(Park) (automatic transmission). Switch offall unnecessary electrical systems (lights,heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ).

WCE0054



CAUTION

● Always connect positive (1) to positive(1) and negative (2) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannotbe push-started or tow-started. Attempt-ing to do so may cause transmissiondamage.

PUSH STARTING



WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap while the engine is stillhot. When the radiator or coolant reser-voir cap is removed, pressurized hotwater will spurt out, possibly causingserious injury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading andthe illumination of the engine oil pressure/enginecoolant temperature high indicator light), or if youfeel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift lever toP (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air conditionertemperature control to maximum hot and fancontrol to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time when the coolanttemperature is high.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS



When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSAN

ACE1037

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE



Two-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (rear) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is necessary totow the vehicle with the front wheelsraised always use towing dollies underthe rear wheels.

● When towing automatic transmissionmodels with the front wheels on theground or on towing dollies:

– Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-sition, and secure the steering wheelin a straight-ahead position with arope or similar device. Never securethe steering wheel by turning the ig-nition key to the LOCK position. Thismay damage the steering lockmechanism.

If the speed or distance must necessarily begreater, remove the propeller shaft before towingto prevent damage to the transmission.



Four-wheel drive modelsNISSAN recommends that towing dollies beused when towing your vehicle or place the ve-hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow 4WD models with any of thewheels on the ground as this may causeserious and expensive damage to thetransfer case and transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

WSD0097 LCE0103



CAUTION

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the main structural members ofthe vehicle or the towing hooks (if soequipped). Otherwise, the vehicle bodywill be damaged.

● Use the towing hook (if so equipped)only to free a vehicle stuck in sand,snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehiclefor a long distance using only the tow-ing hook.

● The towing hook is under tremendousforce when used to free a stuck vehicle.Never pull the hook at an angle.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle.

● Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or coolingsystems.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D.

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.




MEMO

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5


In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect theirappearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Always checkwith your car wash to confirm that acidis not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care


REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily with anoil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3


Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

FLOOR MATSThe use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matter whatmats are used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly positioned inthe footwell to prevent interference withpedal operation. Mats should be maintainedwith regular cleaning and replaced if they be-come excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s sideonly)This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floormats have been specially designed for your ve-hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has agrommet hole incorporated in it. Position the matby placing the floor mat bracket hook through thefloor mat grommet hole while centering the mat inthe footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

WAI0006

CLEANING INTERIOR



SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle, and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5


● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.



8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Variable Voltage Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38


Your new NISSAN has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements with longerservice intervals to save you both time andmoney. However, some day-to-day and regularmaintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as itsemission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide.” You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself


When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires,make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and checkfor any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components Replace the grom-met seal, valve core and cap of the transmitter invehicles equipped with TPMS at every tire re-placement or when reaching the wear limit of thetires.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet .

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) positionmechanism On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selector lever inthe P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-tion and keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake Confirm that your vehicle is heldsecurely on a fairly steep hill with only the parkingbrake applied.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraintsmove up and down smoothly and the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3


Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brakefluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines onthe reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.



When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, applythe parking brake securely and block thewheels to prevent the vehicle from moving.Move the shift selector lever to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may come onat any time without warning, even if theignition key is in the OFF position and theengine is not running. To avoidinjury, al-ways disconnect the negative batterycable before working near the fan.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models with themultiport fuel injection (MFI) system,the fuel filter or fuel lines should beserviced by a NISSAN dealer becausethe fuel lines are under high pressureeven when the engine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS



VQ40DE engine

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir2. Battery3. Fuse/fusible link box4. Engine oil filler cap5. Engine oil dipstick6. Brake fluid reservoir7. Air cleaner8. Drive belt location9. Radiator cap10. Power steering fluid reservoir11. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0507

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection.The anti-freeze so-lution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Ad-ditional engine cooling system additives are notnecessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sureto use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalentwith the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilledwater. The use of other types of coolantsolutions or coolant colors, such as or-ange, may damage the engine coolingsystem.

Outside temperaturedown to

GenuineNISSANLong Life

Antifreeze/Coolant orequivalent

Demineral-ized or dis-tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur-ized tank. When installing the cap, tightenit until a clicking sound is heard.

LDI0436

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM



If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks sB . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark sA , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill sC .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

LDI0437 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL



CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap sA by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plugsB .

5. Remove the drain plug sB with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

WDI0500



7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.


3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.

4. Unscrew the plate covering the oil filter ex-posing the filter.

5. Loosen the oil filter sA with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise. Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of the en-gine.

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

9. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

WDI0502



When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

WARNING

● Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF.Do not mix with other fluids.

● Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATFwill cause deterioration in driveabilityand automatic transmission durability,and may damage the automatic trans-mission, which is not covered by theNISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is alsodescribed on caution labels located in the enginecompartment.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add GenuineNISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill throughthe opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.● Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake fluid specification information,refer to “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can damagethe brake system and affect the vehi-cle’s stopping ability.

● Be sure to clean the filler cap beforeremoving.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

WDI0282

5-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID



BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

WINDOW WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.Add window washer fluid when the low windowwasher fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift thecap off the reservoir tank and pour the windowwasher fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount of win-dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.



LDI0440 LDI0441

WINDOW WASHER FLUID



● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bakingsoda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-ated by the battery is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriveras shown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

WDI0224

BATTERY



2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Do not ground accessories directly tothe battery terminal. Doing so will by-pass the variable voltage control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltagecontrol system. This system measures theamount of electrical discharge from the batteryand controls voltage generated by the generator.

LDI0302

LDI0454

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROLSYSTEM



If you add electrical accessories to your vehicleground it to the body ground sA located near thebattery along the negative battery cable.

1. Power steering fluid pump2. Cooling fan3. Air conditioner4. Crankshaft5. Generator

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position before servicing drive belt.The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusualwear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt isin poor condition or is loose, have it replacedor adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

LDI0449

DRIVE BELT



REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped sAspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceplatinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer for assistance.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe theinside of the air cleaner filter housing and thecover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

s1 Loosen the screw.

s2 Disconnect the electrical connector.

s3 Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleanercover. Remove the air cleaner filter.

SDI1895 LDI0376

SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER



WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce-dure:

1. Open the glove box and press in on thesides so that it will open completely allowingit to hang by the cord.

2. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove thefilter cover.

LDI0442 LDI0387



NOTE:

The filters are marked with air flow arrows.The end of the filter with the arrow shouldface the rear of the vehicle. The arrowsshould face downward.

3. Insert the first filter into the housing and slideit over to the right. Insert the second filterinto the housing.

4. Replace the filter cover.

5. Install the glove box door.

6. Fill out the date information on the smallreplacement label and attach it to the glovebox lid.

CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

LDI0404

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES



REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

s2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

s3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in thegroove.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the washer nozzle sA . This maycause clogging or improper windshield washeroperation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin sB .

WDI0408WDI0595



Rear window wiper blade

s1 Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win-dow.

s2 Push the wiper blade in and pivot until theblade becomes free.

s3 Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm andsnap into place.

WDI0292



If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

Two types of fuses are used. Type A is used in thefuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B isused in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. Theyare stored in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-partment and passenger compartment fuseboxes.

LDI0455

BRAKES FUSES



If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,the type A fuse will not be level with the fusepocket as shown in the illustration. This will notaffect the performance of the fuse. Make sure thefuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in theunderhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

LDI0457 LDI0444



5. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with a newfuse sB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with anequivalent fuse sB .

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

WDI0452 LDI0445Type A

WDI0452



Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

s1 Open the lid using a coin sA .

s2 Remove the battery sB .

s3 Install a new battery sC with the “+” facingdown.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

s4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

Type BLDI0456

LDI0484

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT



If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTS

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Abulb can be replaced from inside the enginecompartment without removing the headlight as-sembly.

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Wattage 65/55Bulb No. HB5/9007*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latestparts information.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture and smoke may enterthe headlight body and affect the per-formance of the headlight.

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

LIGHTS



Removing the headlight bulb

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector from therear end of the bulb.

4. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclock-wise until it is free form the headlight reflec-tor and then remove it sA .

5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do notshake or rotate the bulb when removing itsB .

Replacing the headlight bulb1. Insert the bulb.

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB.

2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.

● Be sure the lip of the bulb socket con-tacts the headlight body.

3. Push the electrical connector into the bulbplastic base until it snaps and stops.

4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.

5. Close the hood.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of theexterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. Atemperature difference between the inside andthe outside of the lens causes the fog. This is nota malfunction. If large drops of water collectinside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

LDI0446



EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*1

Headlight 65/55 9007 (HB5)

Turn signal light/Parking light 28/8 3457AK*2

Side marker 3.8 194

Rear combination light

Turn signal 27 3156AK

Stop/Tail 27/8 3157K

Back-up 18 921

License plate light*2 5 2J6

Fog light*2 55 H11

Personal lights*2 8 AL38

Map lights 8 AL38

Cargo light 8 AL41

High-mounted stop light*2

*1Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

*2The bulb is not serviceable in-vehicle. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.



1. Map lights2. Personal lights3. Cargo light4. High-mount stoplight5. License plate light6. Rear combination light

7. Headlight assembly8. Fog light

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/orcover.

: Indicates bulb removal: Indicates bulb installation

LDI0450 WDI0295



Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.

Map lightsLDI0459

Cargo lightWDI0206

Rear combination lightLDI0448



If you have a flat tire, see the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated. Ifequipped, the system also displays pres-sure of all tires (except the spare tire) onthe display screen by sending a signalfrom a sensor that is installed in eachwheel.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire pressure informa-tion” in the “Display screen, heater, air

conditioner and audio systems” section,“Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tireand Loading Information label (if soequipped) under the 9RecommendedCold Tire Inflation Pressure9 heading. Thislabel is affixed to the driver side centerpillar. Tire pressures should be checkedregularly because:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

●

WHEELS AND TIRES



● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. Thevehicle weight capacity is indi-cated on the Tire and LoadingInformation label (if soequipped). Do not load your ve-hicle beyond this capacity. Over-loading your vehicle may result inreduced tire life, unsafe operat-ing conditions due to prematuretire failure, or unfavorable han-dling characteristics and couldalso lead to a serious accident.Loading beyond the specified ca-pacity may also result in failure ofother vehicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (137 km/h) unless it isequipped with high speed ratedtires. Driving faster than 85 MPH(137 km/h) may result in tire fail-ure, loss of control and possibleinjury.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.



Tire and loading information label

s1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

s2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section.

s3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

s4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

s5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

s6 Spare tire size or compact spare tiresize (if so equipped).

LDI0485



Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire Placard (if soequipped) or the Tire and LoadingInformation label (if so equipped).

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-tion Pressure

Front Original Tire:P245/75R16 109SP265/65R17 110SP265/70R16 111TP265/75R16 114T

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Size Cold Tire Infla-tion Pressure

Rear Original Tire:P245/75R16 109SP265/65R17 110SP265/70R16 111TP265/75R16 114T

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire:P245/75R16 109SP265/65R17 110SP265/70R16 111TP265/75R16 114T

240 kPa, 35 PSI

LDI0393



TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

s1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The 9P9 indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The 9R9 stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

ExampleWDI0394

ExampleWDI0395



7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

s2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Depart-ment Of Transportation.9 The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of Tire Identification Num-ber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

s3 Tire ply composition and material

ExampleWDI0396



The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

s4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

s5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

s6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

s7 The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

s8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.



Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tire size. Other typesmay damage your vehicle. Use chain tensionerswhen recommended by the tire chain manufac-turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of thetire chain must be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damage to thefenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, yourvehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handlingand performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on clearpaved roads.



CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section in this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

WDI0258 WDI0259



● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,speedometer calibration, headlight aimand bumper height. Some of these ef-fects may lead to accidents and couldresult in serious personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics and/orinterference with the brakediscs/drums. Such interference canlead to decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” sectionof this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.





● Do not install a deformed wheel or tireeven if it has been repaired. Suchwheels or tires could have structuraldamage and could fail without warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted orradial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and may dam-age the transmission, transfer case anddifferential gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommendedthat all four tires be replaced with tires of thesame size, brand, construction and tread pattern.The tire pressure and wheel alignment should

also be checked and corrected as necessary.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Wheel balanceUnbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet .

Care of wheels● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.



9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-28Event data recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-29

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29


The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 21-1/8 gal 17-5/8 gal 80 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) *1

Engine oil *7Drain and Refill

With oil filter change 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt 5.1 • Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2• Viscosity SAE 5W-30Without oil filter change 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8

Cooling systemWith reservoir models w/orear air a/c

2-3/4 gal 2-1/4 gal 10.250% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent50% Demineralized or distilled waterWith reservoir modelswith

rear a/c3-1/2 gal 3 gal 13.4

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instructionsin the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF *3

Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*4

Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *6

Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6

Transfer fluidAll mode 4WD — — — Genuine Nissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic

Transmission Fluid *4, *9Part time 4WD — — —

Front final drive oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 Viscosity SAE80W-90 Gear Oil, *8, *9

Rear final drive oil — — — API GL-5 Synthetic 75W–90 Gear Oil or equivalent, *9

Windshield washer fluid (shared between front and rear wipers) 1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”*3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.*4: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON™ III/MERCON™, or equivalent ATF may also be used.*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label.”*7: For further details, see “Changing engine oil.”*8: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0° C (32° F).*9: See your NISSAN dealer for service.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information


FUEL RECOMMENDATIONNISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre-mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research oc-tane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline isnot available you may use unleaded regular gaso-line with an octane rating of at least 87 AKInumber (Research octane number 91), but youmay notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenatesSome fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol withor without advertising their presence. NISSANdoes not recommend the use of fuels of which theoxygenate content and the fuel compatibility foryour NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If indoubt, ask your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other than metha-nol blend is used, it should contain nomore than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may,however, be added up to 15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol (me-thyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It shouldalso contain a suitable amount of appro-priate cosolvents and corrosion inhibi-tors. If not properly formulated with ap-propriate cosolvents and corrosioninhibitors, such methanol blends maycause fuel system damage and/or ve-hicle performance problems. At thistime, sufficient data is not available toensure that all methanol blends are suit-able for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

Technical and consumer information 9-3


E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on level

roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.



ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See 9Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants9 earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oilviscosity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals”.

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

WTI0183



Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSANA/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.



ENGINE

Model VQ40DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 241.30 (3,954)

Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

See the “Emission Control Information label” on the under-side of the hood.

A/T (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug DILFR5A11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS



WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

16 x 7.0J

17 x 7.5J

Tires

P245/75R16

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/65R17

Spare tire Full size

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 187.6(4765)Overall width in (mm) 72.8(1849)Overall height

2WD XE/SE with roof rack in (mm) 72.4(1838)2WD SE-OR with roof rack in (mm) 72.9(1851)2WD LE with roof rack in (mm) 72.5(1841)4WD XE/SE with roof rack in (mm) 72.8(1849)4WD SE-OR with roof rack in (mm) 73.3(1861)4WD LE with roof rack in (mm) 72.9(1851)2WD XE/SE without roof rack in (mm) 69.1(1755)2WD SE-OR without roof rack in (mm) 69.7(1770)2WD LE without roof rack in (mm) 69.2(1757)4WD XE/SE without roof rack in (mm) 69.6(1767)4WD SE-OR without roof rack in (mm) 70.1(1780)4WD LE without roof rack in (mm) 69.7(1770)

Front Track in (mm) 61.8(1569)Rear Track in (mm) 61.8(1569)Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2(2850)Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.

S.S. certification label” onthe center pillar betweenthe driver’s side front andside doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)



When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

LTI0085 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION



ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

LTI0127 WTI0099 LTI0087



TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed tothe underside of the hood as shown.

Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at thelocation mark (small dimple) using a 0.37 in(9.5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to thedrill. Insert two plastic grommets provided.Install the license plate holder using the twobolts (and washers) provided.

2. Mount the license plate using two M6-14mm bolts.

License plate bolt tightening torque:3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

WTI0100 LTI0087 LTI0137

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE



WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped).

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.Both the GVWR and GAWR are locatedon the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. See“Measurement of Weights” later in thissection.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION



Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped). Do not exceed the number ofoccupants shown as “Seating Capacity”on Tire and Loading Information label (ifso equipped).

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.



Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

ExampleLTI0152



5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of Weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

SECURING THE LOADThere are tie down hooks located in the cargoarea as shown. The tie down hooks can be usedto secure cargo with ropes or other types ofstraps.

Do not apply a total load of more than 55lbs. (245 N) to a single sA plastic hook or 44lbs. (196 N) to a single sB plastic hookwhen securing cargo.

Do not apply a total load of more than 110lbs. (490 N) to a single metal floor tie-downhook when securing cargo.

WARNING


● The child restraint top tether strap maybe damaged by contact with items inthe cargo area. Secure any items in thecargo area. Your child could be seri-ously injured or killed in a collision ifthe top tether strap is damaged.

Cargo area ceiling tie-down hooksWTI0125

Cargo area floor tie-down hooksLTI0126



● Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damage couldoccur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could result inloss of control and cause personalinjury.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.



WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used.

The maximum GCWR (Gross Combined WeightRating) should not exceed the value specified inthe following “Towing Load/Specification” chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of thetowing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greaterthan these or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0162

TOWING A TRAILER



Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.Pull to the side of the road to a safe area.Allow the engine to cool and return tonormal operation. See “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadWhen using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 -15 percent of the total trailer load within themaximum tongue load limits shown in the follow-ing “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If thetongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargoto allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

WTI0160 ATI1025



Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue load.

To determine the available towing capacity, usethe following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the9Towing Load/Specification9 chart foundlater in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment andcargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 5,425 lb. (2460 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -6,000 lb. (2721 kg).

● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)from “Towing Load/Specification9 chart -11,133 lb. (5049 kg).

● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-ing Load/Specification9 chart - 6,000 lb.(2721 kg).

6,000 lb. (2721 kg) GVWR

– 5,425 lb. (2460 kg) GVW

= 575 lb. (260 kg) Available for tongueweight

11,133 lb. (5049 kg) GCWR

– 5,425 lb. (2460 kg) GVW

= 5,708 lb. (2588 kg) Capacity available fortowing

575 lb. (260 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 5,708 lb. (2588 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less thanthe maximum towing capacity due to the passen-ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight. If the tongue



load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo toobtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the10 - 15% tongue weight specification even if thecalculated available tongue weight is greaterthan 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is lessthan 10% , reduce the total trailer weight tomatch the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are withinthe required ratings.

Trailer frontal area

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum trailer frontalarea specification may exceed the towingcapacity of the vehicle. This may affect thetowing performance and lead to vehicledamage.

The trailer frontal area affects the towing load of atrailer. The frontal area is the total area of thevehicle and trailer that is affected by air resis-tance while towing. Do not exceed the maximumtrailer frontal area specification shown in the9Towing Load/Specification” chart. The frontalarea can be determined by multiplying the widthof the trailer by the height of the trailer. Forexample, a trailer that is 8 feet wide by 6 feet tallhas a trailer frontal area of 48 square feet.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

US & CAN

2WD 4WD

Towing Capac-ity*1

6,000 lb.(2721 kg)

6,000 lb.(2721 kg)

Tongue Load600 lb.

(272 kg)600 lb.

(272 kg)

Gross Com-bined Weight

Rating

11,133 lb.(5,049 kg)

11,133 lb.(5,049 kg)

Maximum trailerfrontal area

60 sq ft (5.52 sq meters)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculatedassuming a base vehicle with driver and anyoptions required to achieve the rating. Additionalpassengers, cargo and/or optional equipmentwill add weight to the vehicle and reduce yourvehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optionaltrailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Thishitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of

this vehicle when the proper towing equipment isused. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ballthat is rated for the trailer to be towed. GenuineNissan ball mounts and hitch balls are availablefrom your NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optionaltrailer tow package, check the towing capacity ofyour bumper hitch or receiver-type framemounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for yourvehicle and trailer. A genuine Nissan trailer hitchis available from your NISSAN dealer. Make surethe trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicleto help avoid personal injury or property damagedue to sway caused by crosswinds, rough roadsurfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be capableof towing a trailer heavier than the weightrating of the hitch components. Never ex-ceed the weight rating of the hitch compo-nents. Doing so can cause serious personalinjury or property damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:



● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Ball mountThe hitch ball is attached to the ball mount andthe ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.Choose a proper class ball mount based on thetrailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount shouldbe chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with theground.

Weight carrying hitchesA weight carrying or 9dead weight9 ball mount isone that is designed to carry the whole amount oftongue weight and gross weight directly on theball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling”or“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ballmount and to the trailer to distribute the tongueweight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve-hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a giventrailer, and need some of the tongue weighttransferred through the frame and pushing downon the front wheels. This gives stability to the towvehicle.

Another reason to have a weight distributing ballmount is to comply with the rating on your re-ceiver. Most receivers have a weight carryingrating of 5,000 lbs. gross weight, 500 lbs. tongueweight and a weight distribution rating of 10,000lbs. gross weight, 1,000 lbs. tongue weight. Thismeans that without using a weight distributingballmount, the receiver is only designed to carry5,000 lbs.

When hooking up a trailer using a weight distrib-uting hitch, always refer to the hitch manufactur-er’s instructions.

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.With the ignition on and the doors closed,allow the vehicle to stand for several minutesso that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point onthe front and rear bumpers at the center ofthe vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjustthe hitch equalizers so that the front bumperheight is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) ofthe reference height measured in step 2. Therear bumper should be no higher than thereference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributinghitch so the rear of the bumper is nohigher than the measured referenceheight when the trailer is attached. If therear bumper is higher than the measuredreference height when loaded, the vehiclemay handle unpredictably which couldcause a loss of vehicle control and causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Sway control deviceSudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffetingcaused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-dling. Sway control devices may be used to helpcontrol these affects. If you choose to use one,contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to makesure the sway control device will work with thevehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-



tem. Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using the swaycontrol device.

Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

Class II hitchClass II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,510 kg).

Class III hitchClass III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).

The genuine NISSAN step bumper is considereda Class III ball mount.

Class IV hitchClass IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,545 kg). Aweight distributing hitch should be used to towtrailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IVtrailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb(4,545 kg) maximum weight rating, but your ve-hicle is only capable of towing the maximumtrailer weights shown in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart earlier in this section.

CAUTION

● Special hitches which include frame re-inforcements are required for towingabove 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genu-ine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts andhitch balls for pickup trucks and sportutility vehicles are available at aNISSAN dealer.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thehitch and/or receiver when not in use.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

● When towing with the hitch ballmounted to the rear bumper, do notmake sharp turns. The trailer may con-tact the bumper and cause damage tothe bumper or trailer.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safetychains can be attached to the bumper if the hitchball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.



Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with thetrailer tow package are equipped with a 4-pintrailer harness connector. If your trailer isequipped with a 7-pin connector, an adapter willbe needed to connect the trailer lights to thevehicle. Adapters are available at NISSAN deal-ers as well as auto parts stores and hitch retail-ers.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center of gravitylow.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicleand trailer so the required clearance isknown.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-ently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.



● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector lever to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if soequipped) indicates the transfer case is in4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. Ifthe indicator light is flashing, or theATP light is ON, make sure the transmissionis in P (Park) (AT) and turn the 4WD switchto 2WD or 4H. See 9Automatic transmissionpark warning light9 in the 9Instruments andcontrols9 section and 9Using four wheeldrive9 in the 9Starting and driving9 section.

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● When going down a hill, shift into a lowergear and use the engine braking effect.When going up a long grade, downshift thetransmission to a lower gear and reducespeed to reduce chances of engine over-loading and/or overheating. However, for

long steep grades, do not stay in 1st gearwhen driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h) or2nd gear when driving above 58 MPH (93km/h).

● If the engine coolant rises to an extremelyhigh temperature when the air conditionersystem is on, turn off the air conditioner.Coolant heat can be additionally vented byopening the windows, switching the fancontrol to high and setting the temperaturecontrol to the HOT position.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.



● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allowthe vehicle to coast and steer as straight aheadas the road conditions allow. This combinationwill help stabilize the vehicle- Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Down shift the transmission to a lower gearfor engine braking when driving down steepor long hills. This will help slow the vehiclewithout applying the brakes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not useoverdrive.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually

● Do not use cruise control while towing atrailer.

● Some states or provinces have specific regula-tions and speed limits for vehicles that aretowing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When stopped in traffic for long periods oftime in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P(Park) position.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.



Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an automatictransmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUSTbe placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING



WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (USonly)



Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, check the vehicle’sinspection/maintenance test readiness condi-tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and thenblinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is9not ready9. If the MIL does not blink after 20seconds, the I/M test condition is 9ready.9 If theMIL indicates the vehicle is in a 9not ready9 con-dition, drive the vehicle through the followingpattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. Ifyou cannot or do not want to perform the drivingpattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to traffic con-ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C. Al-low the engine to idle until the gauge needlepoints between the C and H (normal oper-ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the acceleratorpedal completely and keep it released for atleast 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)position.


10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-able between steps. Do not stop the engine untilstep 7 is completed.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST



Your vehicle is equipped with a variety ofcomputers that monitor and control a num-ber of systems to optimize performanceand help service technicians with diagno-sis and repair. Some of the computersmonitor emission control systems, brakingsystems, engine systems, transmissionsystems, tire pressure systems, and airbagsystems. Some data about vehicle opera-tion may be stored in the computers for useduring servicing. Other data may be storedif a crash event occurs. For example, ve-hicle speed, brake application, steeringangle, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-mance, and seat belt use by the driver orpassenger may be recorded. These types ofsystems are sometimes called Event DataRecorders.

Special equipment can be used to accessthe electronic data that may be stored inthe vehicle’s computers (sounds are notrecorded). NISSAN and NISSAN dealershave equipment to access some of thisdata; others may also have this equipment.The data may be retrieved during routinevehicle servicing or for special research. Itmight also be accessed with the consent ofthe vehicle owner or lessee, in response toa request by law enforcement, or as other-wise required or permitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood DriveStrongsville, OH 441491-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood DriveStrongsville, OH 441491-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISIONUnfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikelyevent, there is some important information youshould know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorizethe use of non-genuine collision parts in order tocut costs, among other reasons.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION



Insist on the use of genuine NISSANcollision parts!If you want your vehicle to be restored using partsmade to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-tions – if you want to help it to last and hold itsresale value, the solution is simple. Tell yourinsurance agent and your repair shop toonly use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-tection and maintain the resale value of yourvehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, usingGenuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-necessary excess wear and tear expenses at theend of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones tominimize the risk that the hood will penetrate thewindshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide suchbuilt-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to repairyour vehicle. And some states have enacted lawsthat restrict insurance companies from authoriz-ing the use of non-genuine collision parts duringthe new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-tect you, so you can take action to protect your-self.

It’s your right!If you should need further information visit us at:www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) orwww.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).



10 Index

4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

A

Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Adjusting pedal position . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . .1-55, 2-18Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-17Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15, 4-22Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-25Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-25

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-22Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-14Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . . . .5-29

Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-39, 4-45Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-34FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-48

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-17Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-48Automatic transmission positionindicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-11Transmission selector lever lock release .5-13

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-14AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41, 4-47

B

Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35

BrakeAnti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . .5-29Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-27Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-22, 8-21Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-15Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . . . .4-13Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-14Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47CD changer (See audio system) . . . .4-39, 4-45CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-34Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-24Child restraints . . . . . . .1-14, 1-15, 1-20, 1-22

Z REVIEW COPY—2007 Pathfinder (pat)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)10/27/06—betty X

Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-28, 1-35Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-24

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33, 4-42

(models with navigation system) . . . . . .4-12Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-34Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . .4-13Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

ControlsAudio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-48Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15, 4-22Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-25

CoolantCapacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . .1-52

D

Daytime running light system(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

Digital video disc DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-30Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Drive positioner, Automatic. . . . . . . . . . .3-17Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-11Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-10Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-27Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-10Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-16Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8English/metric setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

F

First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-31Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

10-2


Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-47Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Fuel economy setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

G

Garage door opener, HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-8Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glass hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

H

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-31Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-27Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Headphones (See NISSAN mobileentertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Heater

Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15, 4-22Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-16, 4-23Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-25

Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Hill descent control system . . . . . . . . . .5-32Hill start assist (HSA) system . . . . . . . . .5-33HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-53Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8Hook

Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-9Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights andaudible reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . .3-14Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-30Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-30Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-24Keyless entry system(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-5

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Emission control information label . . . . .9-10Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-55

Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

10-3


LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-11Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-55, 2-18Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-27Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-14Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-27Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-27Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-18Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-49Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Warning/indicator lights andaudible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-4Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . .2-16Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-18Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

Luggage storage(see vehicle loading information). . . . . . . .2-42

M

MaintenanceChanging the maintenance interval . . . . .4-5Displaying the maintenance noticereminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Resetting the maintenance interval . . . . .4-5Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-30Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . .3-14Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

N

NISSAN mobile entertainment system(MES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49

NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-9

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . .6-11Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-29Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-15Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Pedal position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Power

Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

10-4


Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5Precautions on child restraints . . .1-20, 1-28,1-35Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-12Precautions on supplementalrestraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . . . .1-53Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-58Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-39, 4-45FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-48

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Rear window wiper and washer switches. . .2-25Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9Remote controller (See NISSAN mobileentertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . .3-5Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-27Resetting the fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Resetting trip 1 and trip 2 . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-4Child seat belts . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-28, 1-35Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-27

Screen (See NISSAN mobileentertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4Second row bench seats . . . . . . . . . .1-5

Seat beltChild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-15Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-12Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16

Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . .1-53Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-18Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-16

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-17Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2

Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start. . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-9Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Shifting

Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . .5-11Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-18Side air bag system (See supplemental side airbag, curtain and rollover air bag systems). . .1-52Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-10Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

10-5


Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Steering

Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . . .4-48Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36, 2-42Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . .1-55Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-55, 2-18Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-47Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-55Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-39Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-48Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-31Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-27Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-27Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-33Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-9Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38Tires of 4-wheel drive. . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-26Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16

Tire pressure display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .5-3Tire rotation maintenance reminder . . . . . . .4-6Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-24

Towing2-wheel drive models. . . . . . . . . . . .6-134-wheel drive models. . . . . . . . . . . .6-14Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-20Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17

TransceiverHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-53

TransmissionDriving with automatic transmission . . . .5-11Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-13

Travel (See registering your vehicle inanother country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

U

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-26

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-33Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-30Vehicle electronic system . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9

10-6


Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14, 7-2Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicleimmobilizer system), engine start . .2-23, 3-2, 5-9Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

W

Warning4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-55, 2-18Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-14Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-15Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-16Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-16Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-31Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-18Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-49Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-22Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-55Warning/indicator lights andaudible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehiclein another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-48Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-24Wiper

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18

10-7


MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

RECOMMENDED FUEL:NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre-mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research oc-tane number 96). If unleaded premium gasolineis not available you may use unleaded regulargasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKInumber (Research octane number 91), but youmay notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found inthe “Starting and driving” section of this manual.Follow these recommendations for the future re-liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Z b15—nna -Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)10/26/06—cathy X

1. Power steering fluid 8-112. Battery 8-133. Engine coolant 8-74. Window washer fluid 8-125. Heater and air conditioner 4-15, 4-22

Audio system 4-266. Passenger supplemental air bag 1-397. Spare tire 6-28. Rear door lock 9-129. Fuel filler cap 3-10;

Fuel recommendations 9-310. Seat belts 1-1211. Door locks 3-312. Driver supplemental air bag 1-3913. Hood release 3-814. Meters and gauges 2-315. Brake fluid 8-1216. Engine oil 8-8

WGS0024

QUICK REFERENCE

Z wzw—nna -Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)10/26/06—cathy X

Documents

2007 Nissan Pathfinder Owners Manual